m
0
0
The
2003
Oldsmobile
Alero
Owner
Manual
a
Seats and Restraint Systems
...........................
1-1
Front Seats
...............................................
1-2
Rear Seats
...............................................
1-8
Safety Belts
..............................................
1-9
Child Restraints
.......................................
1-32
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
......................................
1-53
Restraint System Check
............................
1-60
Keys
........................................................
2-2
Doors and Locks
.......................................
2-7
Windows
.................................................
2-1 4
Theft-Deterrent Systems
............................
2-1 6
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
...........
2-17
Mirrors
....................................................
2-32
Siorage Areas
.........................................
2-34
Sunroof
..................................................
2-35
Instrument Panel Overview
..........................
3-4
Climate Controls
......................................
3-1 9
.w
.arning Lights, Gages and indicators
.........
3-23
Audio
System(s)
.......................................
3-38
Features and Controls
.....................................
2-1
Instrument Panel
.............................................
3-1
Driving Your Vehicle
.......................................
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
.....
4-2
Towing
...................................................
4-31
Service
.....................................................
5-3
Fuel
.........................................................
5-5
Checking Things Under
the
Hood
...............................................
5-9
Headlamp Aiming
.....................................
5-47
Bulb
Replacement
....................................
5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
.........
5-52
Tires
......................................................
5-53
Appearance Care
.....................................
5-72
Vehicle Identification
.................................
5-80
Electrical System
......................................
5-81
Zapai;iiit=s
at-tii
~J~LIIIL~LIUI
I>
5-w~
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
......
5-88
Maintenance Schedule
...........................
...
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
................................
6-2
Customer Assistance Information
....................
7-1
Customer
Assistance
iniorrnation
..................
7-2
Index
.................................................................
1
Service and Appearance Care
..........................
5-1
n.-
-
-:I:
-
-1:
-
.-
-
.....................
7-n
‘JM
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the
GM
Emblem,
OLDSMOBILE, the OLDSMOBILE Rocket Emblem and
the name ALERO are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Oldsmobile Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
so
it will be
there
if
you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell
the vehicle, please leave this manual
in
it
so
the
new owner can use it.
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O.
Box
07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How
to
Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A
good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Litho
in
U.S.A.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/03/02
Part No. 22691532
A
First Edition
All Rights Reserved
ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word
CAUTION
to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
These mean there
is
something that could hurt
you
or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do
to
help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If
you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
...
Ill
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Notice:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle
Symbols
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead
of
text. Symbols, used
on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
“Engine Compartment Overview’’
“Instrument Panel Overview”
0
“Climate Controls”
“Audio Systems”
Also see
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
on
page
3-23.
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may
find
on
your vehicle:
POSSIBLE
A
CAUTION
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVO1 D
1
SPARKS
OR
1
FLAMES
1
BATTERY
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT OCCUPANT
48:
@
DO NOT TWIST SAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
\!$
REARWARD+
/z
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
PULL BELT
COMPLETELY
THEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
I
1
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
DO NOT INSTALL A
'ORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
--,.-.
,.,.,,
a
uvun
Luun
UNLOCK
JGHTING
-
MASTER SWITCH
B-
/
,
\
SIGNALS
@+
TURN
PARKING
pf
LAMPS
DAYTIME
**a
RUNNING
y.:
LAMPS
0
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
CHARGING
I-]
BATTERY
SYSTEM
COOLANT
d
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
Wb
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
OWNERS
MANUAL
SERVICE
SFRVICF
MANUAL
V
Section
1
Seats
and
Restraint Systems
Front Seats
..........................
......
1-2
Manual Seats
...............................
......
1-2
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
.............
,
.........
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
........................................
1-3
Head Restraints
.............................................
1-5
Seatback Latches
...........................................
1-5
Easy Entry Seat
.............................................
1-6
Power Lift Seat
..............................................
1-6
Rear Seats
......................................................
.l -8
Rear Seat Operation
.......
........................
-1 -8
Safety Belts
.....................................................
1-9
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
.................
1-9
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
......
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
.................
1-14
Driver Position
..............................................
1-1
5
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
..................
1-22
Right Front Passenger Position
.......................
1-23
Rear Seat Passengers
..................................
1-23
Lenter Hear passenger Posltion
i
-z
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
_I
.....................
and Small Adults
.......................................
1-29
Safety Belt Extender
.....................................
1-31
Child Restraints
.............................................
1-32
OIder
Children
..............................................
1-32
Infants and Young Children
............................
1-34
Child Restraint Systems
.................................
1-38
Where to Put the Restraint
........
......
1-41
Top Strap
................................................
-1
-41
Top Strap Anchor Location
.............................
1-42
Children (LATCH System)
...........................
1-43
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
Securing
a
Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
LATCH System
.........................................
1-45
Seat Position
............................................
1-45
Seat Position
............................................
1-48
Seat Position
.........................................
1-50
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
.............................................
1-53
Where Are the Air Bags?
...............................
1-55
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
.................... 1-56
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
.....................
1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates?
...
1-57
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
.........
1-59
I I
-
...
n---
--
n.,
ne-
n-e4v-:-q
I
IUVV
uut;a
a1
I
r\ll
uay
1ca11all
I
:
.....................
157
Restraint System Check
..................................
1-60
Checking Your Restraint Systems
...................
1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a
Crash
......................................................
1
-60
1-1
Front
Seats
Manual
Seats
1
"J
can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you,
or
make you push a pedal
when you don't want to. Adjust the driver's
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
I
Lift the bar located under the front
of
the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar.
Try
to
move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Six-Way Power Driver
Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
If
your vehicle has this
feature, the power seat
control is located on
the outboard side of the
driver's seat.
This control allows you to move the seat
up,
down,
forward, or backward. It will also move the front or rear
of the seat cushion up or down.
Move the seat forward or rearward by pushing the
control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by holding
II-
-
-
-.-1..-I
.
"-
^-
A
-...-
11
le
LUI
ILIUI
up
VI
UUVVI
I.
Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
holding the front
of
the control up or down.
To
adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and move the seatback
to
where you want it. Release the lever to lock the
seatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
snrthzck
IPC!
!he
seafhack
will
20
to
an
upright position.
0
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
holding the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if
your vehicle is
moving.
Sitting
in
a reclined position when your vehic
is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if
you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do
its
job
because
it
won’t be against your body. Instead,
it
will be
in front
of
you. In a crash you could
go
into
it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do it’s job either. In
a
crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then
sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1
-4
Head Restraints
Seatback Latches
For two-door model vehicles, the front seatbacks fold
forward to let people get into the back seat. The
seatback latch is designed for one-handed operation.
To
fold a front seatback forward, lift the seatback
latch fully without pushing forward on the seatback to
unlock it. Then the seatback will fold forward.
1
Push the seatback to its original position, and the
seatback will lock.
If
the seatback isn't locked, it could move
forward
in
a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to
be
sure it is
locked.
1
-5
Easy
Entry
Seat
For two-door model vehicles, the right front seat of your
vehicle makes it easy for people to get in and out of
the rear seat.
1.
Fold the right front seatback forward by lifting the
2.
The seat will slide forward to allow someone to get
seatback latch fully.
into the rear seat area.
3.
Push the seatback upright to lock it and slide the
seat fully rearward to lock it.
4.
Adjust the seat to the desired position.
5.
The front passenger should try to move the seat to
make
sllrc’!
the
seat
is
Inckeri
intn
place.
If
the easy try right frc
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After
you’ve used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat
to
be sure it
is
locked.
Power
Lift
Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, to move the power lift
seat forward or rearward, pull
up
on the lever located
under the front of the driver’s seat to unlock
it.
Slide the
seat to where you want it and release the lever. Try
to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat
is locked into place.
1
-6
Rear
Seats
Rear
Seat
Operation
Folding
the Seatback
If
your vehicle has this feature, do the following:
1.
Pull the release straps
located in the trunk. The
right strap operates
the passenger’s side rear
split seat. The left
strap operates the
driver’s side rear
split seat.
To raise the seatback, push the seatback up to return it
to its original position.
Push
and pull on the seatback to make sure it is latched
securely
in
the fully upright position.
2.
Fold
the seatback down from the inside of the
vehicle.
1-8
Safety
Belts
Safety Belts: They
Are
for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how
to
use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle
or
be ejected from
it.
You can be seriously injured or killed.
In
the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
fastened properly too.
2!?d
check
fhll
p.!1
p2ssenCJerr’
he!fs
arc?
It
is
extremely dangerous to ride
in
a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In
a
collision, people riding
in
these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do
not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that
is
not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is
in
a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
1-9
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page
3-26.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why:
They work.
You
never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you
do
have a
crash, you don’t know
if
it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than
30
years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter
...
a lot!
Why
Safety
Belts
Work
When you ride in or on anything, you
go
as fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
L
a,
52
L
a,
ir
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In
a
real vehicle, it could be the windshield
...
or the instrument panel
...
1-12
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
y01-1
cpt
mnre
time
tn
stop
Yo11
stop
over
more
distance:
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q:
Won’t
I
be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You
could
be
-
whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even
if
you’re upside down. And your chance
of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get out, is
much
greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If
my
vehicle has air bags, why should
I
have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only;
so
they work
with
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags,
you
still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
saieiy
beiis
-
rlui
ir-lsieaii
UI
LII~ITI.
CVCI
y
all
uay
C&I--
r
-:..I---
but
especia!!y
in
side
and
other
co!lMQnsl
1-13
Q: If I’m a good driver, and
I
never drive far from
home, why should
I
wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but
if
you’re in an
accident
-
even one that isn’t your fault
-
you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such
as
bad drivers.
Most
accidents occur within
25
miles
(40
km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40
mph
(65
km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How
to
Wear
Safety
Belts
Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things
to
know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies.
If
a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page
7-32
or
Infants
and
Young Children on page
7-34.
Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want
to
know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-14
Driver
Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1.
Close
and
lock the door.
2.
Adjust the seat
so
you can sit up straight. To see
how, see
Manual Seats on page
1-2
or
Six-Way
Power Driver Seat on page
1-3.
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock
if
you pull the belt
go
back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
isruss
yuu very qui&iy.
II
tr11s
i~apper~s,
iei
ttt.
ijt.ii
.I
*I
*
1-15
4.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If
the belt isn’t long enough, see
Safety
Belt Extender
on
page
1-3
1.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
5.
To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
I
I--
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If
you slid under it.
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or
if
you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Four-Door
Models)
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that
is
right for you.
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height
so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off
your shoulder.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt
if
your shoulder belt
is too loose.
In
a
crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt
is
too loose. It won’t give nearly
as
much protection this way.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
if
your belt
is
buckled
in
the wrong place like
this.
In
a
crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The
belt
is
buckled
in
the
wrong
place.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
I
I
I
I
I
I
A:
The shoulder belt
is
worn under the arm.
It
should
be worn over the shoulder at
all
times.
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm.
In
a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
1-20
Q:
What's wrong with this?
-IOU
ci.. be serio
--.,
.njured by
a
twisted b
_._.
In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces.
If
a belt
is
twisted, make it straight
so
it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to
fix
it.
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
A:
The belt
is
twisted
across
the bodv.
1-21
To unlatch the belt, just push the button
on
the buckle.
The belt should go back out
of
the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the
way.
If
you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A
pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt
in
a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To
learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see
Driver Position on page
1-75.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt
-
except for one
thing.
If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature.
if
this
happens, just
iet
the
beit
go
back aii
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside
Passenger
Positions
1-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
2.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let
it
get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock
if
you pull the belt
across you very quickly.
If
this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the belt stops before
it
reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt
Extender on page
7-37.
Make sure the release
button on the buckle is positioned
so
you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if
you
ever had to.
1-24
3,
To
make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end
of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be
less Ilkely
to
sllde under the iap Delt.
it
you
siia
under
ir,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts
of
the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-25
The safety belt locks
if
there’s a sudden
stop
or a crash,
or
if
you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
You can be seriously hurt
if
your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-26
Center Rear Passenger Position
n
Lap
Belt
When
vou
sit in the center seatinu position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To
make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
1-27
To
make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way
as the
lap
part
of
a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see
Safety Belt Extender
on
page
7-37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly
if
you ever had to.
1-28
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children
and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already.
If
it doesn’t,
you can get it from any
GM
dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat.
To
provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s
how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1.
Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-29
2.
Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges
of the
belt into the slots
of
the guide.
3.
Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-30
I
4.
Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in
Rear Seat Passengers on page
7-23.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
31
luuluel.
-L-..l-l-..
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together
so
that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and
clip
inward and in between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving only the loop of the
elastic cord exposed.
Safety
Belt
Extender
If
the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But
if
a safety belt isn't long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender.
It's
free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so
the extender
will
be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat
in
your
vehicle that you choose. Don't let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt.
1-31
Child Restraints
Older
Children
Q:
What
is
the proper way to wear safety belts?
A:
If
possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should
fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top
of
the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need
to
use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If
you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window
so
the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-32
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces.
In
a
crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.
A
belt
must be used by only one person at
a
time.
Q:
What
if
a child
is
wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but
the child
is so
small that the shoulder belt
is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still
is
on the child’s
shoulder,
so
that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the
Index.
If
the child is
so
small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
1-33
Here a child is sitting
in
a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part
is
behind the child.
If
the child wears the belt
in
CAUTION:
(Continued)
this --ay,
in
a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants
and
Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1
-34
People should never hold
a
baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle.
A
baby doesn’t weigh
much
--
until a crash. During
a
crash a baby
will become
so
heavy
it
is not possible to hold
it.
For example, in a crash at only
25
mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb.
(5.5
kg) baby
will
suddenly
become a 240-lb. (1 10 kg) force on a person’s
arms.
A
baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-35
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when
it
inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
CAUTION:
(Continued)
a
oldel Iren,
I
t
not for yo- g children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on child
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
restraints?
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether
or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in
a motor vehicle.
If
it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
1-36
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
with special -eeds.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs
so
much
compared with the rest of
its
body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint,
so
the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
J
The body
StrL,,,.?
0.
-
young child
is
quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed.
A
young child’s
hip bones are still
so
small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as
it
should. Instead,
it
may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Child
Restraint
Systems
I
An infant car bed
(A),
a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain
or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat
(B)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1
-38
A
forward-facing child seat
(C-E)
provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A
booster seat
(F-G)
is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
scri-l-lt:
i-,;y;-l-b&ck
bcrijste.
se&is
;-ldL.t:
~
;i.v.t;-pcjii-lt
;-.&rr,ess.
1-39
Q:
How
do
child
restraints
work?
A:
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each
of
the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap.
A
shield may take the
place
of
hip straps.
A
T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body.
A
shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to
a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If
it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has
to
be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to
this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important,
so
if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
1-40
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front r-?se
?r
seat. Here’s wt--
A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed
if
the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This
is
because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a
You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, but before you
do,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
child i-estraiiit
iii
ii
rea
sea:.
unmu
en-+
I
CUI
ilUUL.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle
-
even when no child
is
in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anch,ored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If
yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If
the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-41
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap.
If
your child restraint has a
top strap,
it
should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.
1-42
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for
Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the
LATCH
system. You’ll find
anchors
(A)
in the rear outside seat positions.
To
assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH
system will have a label applied to the seatback
at each anchor position.
The labels are located
near the base
of the two
rear outside seating
positions.
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points
(B)
at its base and a top tether anchor
(C),
or a
as shown here.
.
I. !I
-1
.-
-
1..-
...
I
II-
_I
I-
- -
-.I-
-I-!.-
I
--:.-a-
lr)\
re~r-(ac%1y
GI
IIIU
Iesuall
11
11
lat
I
lab
at~ac;~
III
IY
pull
113
(uj,
1-43
With this system, use the LATCH system instead
of
the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure
a
child restraint.
If a LATCH-type child restraint
isn’t
attached to
its
anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH system’’ or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position’’
in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.
1
-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for
the LATCH System
1.
Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2.
Put the child restraint on the seat.
3.
Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4.
If
the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See
Top Strap on
page
1-41.
Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
Securing
a
Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If
your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-43.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1.
Put the restraint on the seat.
2.
Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
wi!!
show
you
how.
1
-45
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
1-46
4.
To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint.
If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5.
Push and pull the child restraint
in
different
directions to
be
sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it
go
back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in
a
Center Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say. See
Top Strap
on
page
1-41
if
the child
restraint has one.
1.
Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2.
Put the restraint on the seat.
3.
Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-48
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
5.
To
tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
if
you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as
you
tighten the belt.
6.
Push and
pull
the child restraint
in
different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To
remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1
-49
Securing a Child Restraint
in
the
Right Front Seat Position
U
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed
if
the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back
of
the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
Top
Strap on
page
1-41,
if
the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1.
Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See
Manual Seats
on
page
1-2.
2.
Put the restraint on the seat.
3.
Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-50
6.
To
tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
directions to be sure it is secure.
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
To
remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let
it
go back all the
way.
The safety
belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-52
Supplemental Restraint
System
(SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint
System
(SRS)
or air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags
-
one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
You
~-.i
be severely
...,
ured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt
-
even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from
it.
Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air
bags are designed to work only in moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all
in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, air bags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful air bags have provided in the
past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
an air bag for that person.
QUIGL~
u~nc
pa
wrrn
~y
wwn~~cnn~n
VI
nnwc
~~nrn
L.
Y
e.m#n+w,
kml+
munnemlss
~
..,hn+hnr
mn+
+knwn’e
1-53
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward,
it
could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you
in
position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should
sit
as far back as possible while
still
maintaining
control of the vehicle.
A
CAU,TION:
Anyone who
is
up against, or very close to,
any air bag when
it
inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants.Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the parts of this manual called “Older
Children” and “Infants and Young Children”.
1-54
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are
the
Air
Bags?
~~
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you
if
there is an electrical
Problem. See
Air
Bag Readiness Light on page
3-26.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
sLei2i-,y
.w.i-,ee;.
1
-55
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or
it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
When
Should
an
Air
Bag
Inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate
only
if
the impact speed
is
above the system’s designed
“threshold level”.
If
your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level is about
9
to 14 mph
(14
to
23
km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design,
so
that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
1-56
If
your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because
inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag
and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in
irorli
ui
ine
rigni ironi passenger.
How
Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types
of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only
in
moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What
Will
You
See After an
Air
Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so
quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
iniiated. some components
of
the air bag module
-
the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag
-
will be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not
too
hot to touch.
1-57
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents
in
the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the
vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there
is
dust
in
the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.
To
avoid
this,
everyone
in
the vehicle should get out as soon as
it
is
safe
to do
so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door.
In
many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
e
e
e
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system.
If
you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash.
A
new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module
in
the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag.
Do
not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-58
Servicing Your
Air
Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts
of
the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications
Ordering Information
on
page
7-
10.
For up tc
.D
minutes after the igniti,.i key is
turned
off
and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when
it
inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you
is
qualified to do
so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-59
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If
a belt
is torn or frayed, get
a
new one right away.
Also
look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
A
crash can damage the restrain1 (stems in
your vehicle.
A
damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using
it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash.
To
help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after
a
crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-60
If
you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
If
your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
system parts?
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But
if
the belts were stretched, as they would be
if
If
an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
worn during a more severe crash, then you need system parts. See
Supplemental Restraint System
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even
if
the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
(SRS)
on
page
1-53.
1-61
Section
2
Features and Controls
Keys
...............................................................
2.2
Remote Keyless Entry System
.........................
2.3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
..........
-2-4
Doors and
Locks
.............................................
2-7
Door Locks
...................................................
-2-7
Power Door Locks
..........................................
2-8
Delayed Locking
............................................
-2-8
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
................................................
2.8
Rear Door Security Locks
..............................
2-10
Lockout Protection
........................................
2.11
Leaving Your Vehicle
....................................
2-1
1
Trunk
..........................................................
2-1
1
Windows
..........................
......................
-2-1 4
Manual Windows
......................................
-2-1 4
Power Windows
.............................
.......
2.15
Sun Visors
...............................................
2.15
Theft-Deterrent Systems
..................................
2.16
Passlock@
@
.................................................
2.16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
................
2.17
New Vehicle Break-In
....................................
2.17
Ignition Positions
..........................................
2.17
Starting Your Engine
.................................
2.18
Engine Coolant Heater
..................................
2.20
Automatic Transaxle Operation
.......................
2.22
Manual Transaxle Operation
...........................
2.25
Parking Brake
..............................................
2.26
Parking Your Vehicle/Key Removal
..................
2-29
Engine Exhaust
............................................
2-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
....
2-30
Mirrors
...........................................................
2-32
Manual Rearview Mirror
.................................
2-32
Outside Remote Control Mirror
.......................
2-32
Outside Power Mirrors
...................................
2-33
Outside Convex Mirror
...................................
2-33
Storage Areas
................................................
2-34
Glove Box
...................................................
2.34
Cupnoiaerjsj
d-34
Center Console Storage Area
.........................
2-34
Sunroof
.........................................................
2.35
Shifting Into Park
(P)
.....................................
2-27
Shifting Out
of Park (P)
.................................
2-28
Parking Over Things That Burn
.......................
2-29
n
e’
................................................
2-
1
Keys
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons.
A
child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition and all locks.
When a new vehicle
is
delivered, the key has a
bar-coded key tag. This tag may be removed by your
dealer before it is delivered.
Each tag has a key code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you'll be able
to
have one made easily using this tag. If you need
See
Roadside Assistance Program
on
page
7-5
for more
information.
I^...
I,-.,
--
+A
..-,,r
A,-.,I,"
S'."
tL#.
r.rrrrn,-.+
I,_>,
a
I
IGVV
ncy,
yu
tu
yuu~
uGat--=l
IWI
LI
IG
UUI
I
G~L
nGy
UWUG.
Notice:
Your vehicle has a number
of
new features
that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot
of
trouble getting into your vehicle
if
you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in.
So
be sure you have
spare keys.
Remote
Keyless
Entry
System
If
equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
i
.
I
nis aevice may
nor
cause
inierfererlce,
arid
2.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
-.
2-3
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system.
If
the
transmitter does not work or
if
you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
e
e
e
e
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine
if
battery replacement
is
necessary. See
“Battery Replacement”
under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on
page
2-4.
If
you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If
your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about
3
feet
(1
m) up to
30
feet
(9
m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
The following functions are
available with the keyless
entry system:
@
(Lock): All doors will automatically lock when this
button on the transmitter is pressed. The interior
lamps will turn
off after all of the doors are closed.
If
all
of the doors are closed, the parking lamps will flash
twice and the horn will chirp to indicate locking
has occurred.
2-4
6\
(Unlock): The driver’s door will unlock
automatically when this button on the transmitter is
pressed.
If
the button is pressed again within five
seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will stay on for
10
seconds or until the ignition is
turned on. The parking lamps will flash twice to
indicate unlocking has occurred.
(rsy
(Remote Trunk Release): The trunk will unlock
when the vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed,
as long as the trunk lockout
is
not engaged. You
can open the trunk with the transmitter when the vehicle
speed is less than
2
mph
(3
km/h), when the parking
brake is engaged, or when the ignition is
off.
The interior
lamps will come on for
10
seconds or until the ignition
switch is turned to
ON.
.#
(Horn): The horn
will
sound and the headlamps
and the parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes
when the horn symbol on the transmitter is pressed. The
interior
lamps
will come on and remain on while the
horn is sounding and the lamps are flashing. The horn
and lamps can be turned
off
by pressing the horn
symbol button again or by turning the ignition to
ON.
Programmable
Horn
Chirp
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors or use the delayed locking feature
the parking lamps will flash and the horn will chirp.
The programmable horn chirp can be disabled by
pressing and holding either
of the door lock switches in
the unlock position for
10
seconds with the ignition
ON
and all of the doors closed. When you hear the horn
chirp, programming is complete.
To
reactivate the horn chirp feature, repeat the above
procedure.
Matching Transmitter(s)
to
Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
ynlIr
dealer
When
the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery
is
weak
if
the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location.
If
you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice:
When replacing the battery, use care not
to
touch any
of
the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1.
Use a flat object like a coin to separate the bottom
half from the top half of the transmitter.
2.
Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces
up.
Use one three-volt,
CR2032,
or
equivalent, type battery.
3.
Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is on tightly,
so
water won’t get in.
2-6
Doors
and
Locks
Door
Lcnks
~~
-
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers
-
especially children
-
can
easily open
the
doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door
is
locked, the
handle won’t open
it.
You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in
a crash
if
the doors aren’t locked.
So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A
child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave
it.
unlocked door when you
slow
down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent
this
from happening.
Young children who get into unlocked
szcer
per!?laK!n!
i!?;wies
cr e‘!e!?
del!!?
0
Outsiders can easily enter through an
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote keyless
entry system, if your vehicle
is
equipped with this
feature.
If
your vehicle has remote keyless entry, you
can only use your key to unlock the driver’s side door.
From tne insiae, you can iock or uniock
ine
door
by
moving the manual lever forward or rearward.
2-7
Power Door Locks
With the power door locks, you can lock or unlock all of
the doors on your vehicle using the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock switch.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock
all
of the doors.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all of the doors.
Delayed Locking
This feature will allow the driver to delay the actual
locking of the vehicle. This feature will not operate
if
the
key is left in the ignition. See
Lockout
Protection on
page2-71
later in this section.
When the lower part of the driver’s power door lock
switch is pressed, with the key removed from the ignition
and the driver’s door open, three chimes will be heard.
The doors will not lock. Seven seconds after the
driver’s door has been closed, all of the doors will lock
and the parking lamps will flash. The horn will also
chirp
if
the horn chirp feature is enabled. See
“Programmable Horn Chirp” listed previously for more
information.
If
the driver opens another door before the seven
seconds are up, the doors will not lock until seven
seconds have elapsed after the last door is closed.
If
the lower part of the power door lock switch is
pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, or the lock
symbol button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, the doors will lock immediately.
If
the power door lock switch is pressed to unlock, the
doors will not lock automatically.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle has a feature that allows you to program
your power door locks to automatically lock and
unlock under certain conditions. You can program your
vehicle to have all of the doors lock when you move
your shift lever out of PARK (P) to REVERSE
(R)
if
your
vehicle has an automatic transaxle or when the
vehicle speed is greater than
5
mph (8 km/h)
if
your
vehicle has a manual transaxle.
If
someone needs to get
out while the vehicle is running, have that person use
the door lock. When the door is closed again, it will lock
automatically when the vehicle reaches about
5
mph
(8
km/h). You can also program all doors to
automatically unlock when the shift lever is moved to
PARK (P) on vehicles with an automatic transaxle or to
REVERSE (R) on vehicles with a manual transaxle
when the key is turned to
OFF.
2-8
Customizing the Automatic
Door
Locks
One of four operating modes may be selected and
programmed by the driver on vehicles with an automatic
transaxle:
Mode
1:
All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will remain
locked unless manually unlocked or the lock button is
pressed.
All
doors will unlock when the transaxle is
shifted into PARK (P) and the key is turned to
OFF.
Mode
2:
This mode is only available on vehicles
equipped with a remote keyless entry transmitter.
All
doors automatically lock when the transaxle is shifted
out of PARK (P). Automatic driver’s door only unlock
when the transaxle
is
shifted into PARK (P) and the key
is turned to
OFF.
Mode
3:
All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P).
No
automatic door unlock.
Mode
4:
No
automatic door lock or unlock.
One of the four operating modes may be selected and
transaxle:
Mode
1:
All
doors automatically lock when the vehicle
speed is greater than
5
mph (8 km/h). The doors
will remain locked unless manually unlocked or the lock
huffon
is
pressed.
A!!
doors
will
unlock
when the
transaxle
is
shifted into REVERSE (R) and the key is
turned to
OFF.
^I
I-.
.
11-
-
-I..:.
_^__
-.-
.-.l-:-1--
...
:*L.
-^_.
.,I
~IUCJI~I
I
11
II~U
uy
11
IG
UI
IVGI
VI
I
VGI
IILIGCI
VVILI
I
6
I
I
la1
lual
Mode 2: This mode is only available with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. All doors automatically
lock when the vehicle speed is greater than
5
mph
(8 km/h). Automatic driver’s door only unlock when the
transaxle is shifted into REVERSE (R) and the key
is turned to
OFF.
Mode
3:
All doors automatically lock when the vehicle
speed is greater than
5
mph
(8
km/h).
No
automatic
door unlock.
Mode
4:
No
automatic door lock or unlock.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory
it
was
programmed in Mode
1.
To determine the current
mode or to change to a different mode, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a
manual transaxle
in
REVERSE (R) with the parking
brake engaged and turn the ignition to
ON.
Press and hold the lower part of the power door
lock switch for
10
seconds. Release the switch
when you hear the chime.
Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
You
can change the mode by pressing and
holding the lower part of the power door lock switch
(two chimes for Mode
2,
three chimes for Mode
3
and four chimes for Mode
4).
Repeat Step
2
until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
c!
chirzcs
tc!!s
yc:
v:!ic!?
n?!x!e
;‘c)L!!-
vehk!e
In
in-
The mode you selected
is
now set.
2-9
Rear Door Security Locks
If
your vehicle is a four-door model, it has rear door
security locks that help prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The switch is located on
the inside of the rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature
is
in use.
If
you want
to
open a rear door when the security lock
is
on, do
the following:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside.
2.
Then open the door from the outside.
If
you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able
to
open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how these security locks work,
and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel a rear door lock,
do
the following:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside and open it from
2.
Move the switch down.
the outside.
3.
Do
the same to the other rear door.
The rear doors will now work normally.
To use the security locks, do the following:
1.
Move the switch up.
2.
Close the door.
3.
Do
the same thing to the other rear door.
2-1
0
Lockout Protection
Lockout protection is intended to provide enhanced
security and convenience. This feature prevents a driver
who has left the keys in the ignition from locking the
doors, using the power door locks while any door
is open.
To override this feature, when the key is in the ignition
and any door is open, press and hold down the
power door lock switch for three seconds.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle.
If
you don’t leave the keys in
the ignition, or
if
you use the manual door lock or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, you could still lock your
keys inside your vehicle. Always remember to take
your keys with you.
Leaving
Your Vehicle
If you are leaving your vehicle, open your door and
set the locks from the inside, then get out and close
the door.
Trunk
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
’+
‘ully latches.
It
can be d,,,gerous
L
drive wit.. Ihe trL ...
c
lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO.
It
can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the trunk
lid
open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk
lid:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
0
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to
its
highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Controls”
in
the Index.
instrument panel, open them all the way.
-
!f
ywu
lIUYC
UII
“ULlrLV
V.,
V.
U..UY.
L..
Y
.-~~ma
CImnerr
mi~
AII+ICI+E
A-
AS.
~~nr(ar
)ha
See “Engine Exhaust”
in
the Index.
To
unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key and
turn the trunk lock cylinder or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter,
if
your vehicle has this feature.
2-1
1
Remote Trunk Release
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
The switch is located on the inside
of
the trunk lid,
mounted to the trunk lid latch.
Press the remote trunk release button, located on the
driver’s door, to release the trunk lid.
Make sure the remote trunk release lockout feature
is
not activated.
Also,
the remote trunk release will
only work when either the ignition is
off,
the parking
brake is engaged or the vehicle speed is less than
2
mph
(3
km/h).
To turn the lockout on, slide the switch all the way to
the left
(ON).
To
turn the lockout off, slide the switch all
the way to the right
(OFF).
When the lockout is on, the remote trunk release switch
on the driver’s door will not release the trunk lid.
However, the trunk lid can still be opened with the key,
but not with the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if
your vehicle has this feature.
2-1
2
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
v‘
Notice:
The emergency trunk release handle is not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid
or
as
an anchor point when securing items in the trunk.
handle could damage it.
I-nwnm-w
mmen
-4
+ha
nmnrnnnrur
tr1Bnk
rnlngcn
nnntrr
urws
v-zb
VI
LIIW
-m..v.
3-m
m-1
=m
-...I
.-.-I--
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
rzlease
handle
up
te
open
the
trur~k
frm
the
inside.
Trap-Resistant Trunk
Kit
To
help prevent
a
child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from
your dealer. This kit includes:
a modified trunk latch,
a lighted release handle, and
@
seatback tethers (for vehicles with folding rear
seat backs).
See your dealer for additional information.
2-1
3
Windows
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous.
A
child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in
a
vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual
Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank
to
open and close each window.
2-1
4
Power
Windows
If
your vehicle has power window switches, they are
located on the armrest on the driver’s door. In addition,
each passenger door has a window switch.
Express ‘Down vvinaow
The driver’s window switch has an express down
feature. This switch is labeled
AUTO.
Press the rear of
the switch slightly down, and the driver‘s window will
open a small amount.
If
the rear of the switch
is
pressed
all the way down, the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch.
To
raise the window, press and hold
the front of the switch.
Window
Lockout
On four-door models, the driver’s power window
controls also include a window lockout. When the
lockout switch is moved to the left, the driver and
passengers will be able to use their window switches.
Move the lockout switch to the right to stop the
passengers from using their window switches. The
driver can still operate
all
of the windows with the
lock on.
Sun
Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side, to block out glare from the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swlng down tne sun visor ana
iiit
tne cover
io
expose
the vanity mirror.
2-1
5
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in
some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it
impossible to steal.
Passlock@
Your vehicle has the Passlock@ theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@ enables fuel
if
the ignition lock cylinder has
not been tampered with.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off
approximately five seconds after the ignition key is
turned to
ON
and the engine is started.
After attempting to start the engine,
if
the SECURITY
light flashes or stays on, wait ten minutes with the key in
ON
until the light goes off. Then turn the ignition to
OFF
before attempting to start the engine again.
See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page
7-5
for
more information.
2-1
6
Starting and Operating
Your
Vehicle
New
Vehicle
Break-In
Nofice:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But
it
will perform better
in
the long run
if
you follow these guidelines:
0
0
0
Don’t drive at any one speed
-
fast or
slow
-
for the first
500
miles
(805
km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200
miles
(322
km) or
so.
During
this
time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken
in.
Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t
tow
a
trailer
during
break-in.
See
“Towing
a Trailer”
in
the Index for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn
it
to four
different positions.
A
hB
A
(OFF):
This is the only position from which you can
shift lever must be in PARK (P) with the ignition in
OFF
to remove the key. With
a
manual transaxle, the shift
lever must be in
REVERSE
(R) with the ignition in
OFF
to remove the key.
I~IIIUV~:
iP~t:
key.
VVIU
I
21-1
huiei-fi&ic
tTSiTsZ26,
th~
8
18!1l-
2-1
7
A warning chime will sound
if
you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is
off and the key is in the ignition.
Notice:
If
your key seems stuck in
OFF
and
you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key;
if
so,
is
it all the way in? Turn the key only
with your hand. Using
a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch.
If
none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
B
(ACCESSORY): This position unlocks the transaxle.
It also lets you use things like the radio and windshield
wipers when the engine is not running. To use
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise to the first
position. Use this position
if
your vehicle must be pushed
or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.
C (ON): This position is where the key returns to after
you start your engine and release the key. The
ignition switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can
use
ON
to operate your electrical accessories and to
display some instrument panel warning lights.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio to
continue
to
work up to
10
minutes after the ignition is
turned to OFF.
Your radio will work when the ignition key is in ON or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON
to
OFF,
the radio will continue
to
work up
to
10
minutes or
until the driver’s door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever
to
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
-
that’s
a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle
is
moving.
If
you
do,
you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in neutral and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start
if
the clutch
pedal is not all the way down
-
that’s a safety feature.
2-1
8
Starting Your
2.2L
L4
ECOTECTM
Engine
1.
With your foot
off
the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at
a
time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15
seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2.
If
it doesn’t start, wait about
15
seconds and
try again to start the engine by turning the ignition
key to START. Wait about
15
seconds between
each try.
When your engine has run about
10
seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t
“race” your engine when it’s cold.
If the weather is below freezing
(32°F
or
O’C),
let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3.
If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
iioor and hoiding
it
there as you noia the key in
START for about three seconds.
If
the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six
seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine.
Nofice:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer.
If
you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Starting
Your
3400
V6
Engine
1.
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Notice:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15
seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2.
If the engine doesn’t start
in
10
seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START.
Do
this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
thn
Lnn,
11
vz
nGy.
2-1
9
3.
If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START
for a maximum of
15
seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine.
If
the engine
still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat Step
1
or
2,
depending on temperature.
When the engine starts, release the key and the
accelerator pedal.
Notice:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer.
If
you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
2-20
3400
V6
Engine
In very cold weather,
0°F
(-18°C)
or colder, the engine
coolant heater,
if
your vehicle has this feature, can
help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economy
during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures above
32°F
(OOC),
use of the coolant heater is not required.
To Use
the Engine Coolant Heater
1.
Turn off the engine.
2.
Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On
the 2.2L L4
ECOTECTM
engine, the engine coolant
heater cord is located in front of the coolant
surge tank on the passenger's side
of
the engine
compartment. On the
3400
V6
engine, the
engine coolant heater cord is located near the
engine air cleaner/filter. See
Engine
Compartment
Overview on page
5-12
for more information on
location.
3.
Plug
it
into a normal, grounded
1
IO-volt AC
outlet.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded ou'
t
could cause an electrical shock.
Also,
the
wrong kind
of
extension cord could overheat
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong
11
0-volt
AC
outlet.
If
the cord
won't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least
15
amps.
2nd
!-?z!Jse
2
fire.
VQL!
C?!!!,!
he
Seri~IJsly
2-2
1
4.
Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts.
If
you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle
has a shift lever located
on the console between
the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
It
igerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the
shift lever
is
not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to.
If
you have
left
the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You
or
others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer”
in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You have to apply your regular brake
before you can shift from PARK
(P)
when the ignition key
is
in
ON.
If
you cannot shift out of PARK
(P),
ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
2-22
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever. See
Shifting Out
of
Park
(P)
on page
2-28
later
in
this section.
REVERSE (R):
Use this gear
to
back up.
Notice:
Shifting to REVERSE
(R)
while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To
rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
If
You
Are Stuck:
In
Sand, Mud, Ice
or
Snow
on
page
4-29.
NEUTRAL
(N):
In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
,,ifling into a drive gear while your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into
a
drive gear while your engine
is racing.
Notice:
Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t
covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
This position is for
normal driving.
If
you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than
35
mph
(55
km/h), push your
0
Going about
35
mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
You’ll
shift down to the next gear and have more power.
acceieraivr
pedai
abwui
ilaiiway
~UWI-I.
accelerator all the way down.
2-23
Notice:
If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if
it
seems not to
shift
gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.
So,
if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND
(2)
when you are driving
less than
35
mph
(55
kmh) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.
THIRD
(3):
This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose THIRD
(3)
instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer,
so
there is less shifting
When going down a steep hill.
between gears.
SECOND
(2):
This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy.
You
can use SECOND
(2)
on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Notice:
Don’t drive in SECOND
(2)
for more than
25
miles
(40
km), or at speeds over
55
mph
(90
km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. Use
THIRD
(3)
or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND
(2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph
(105
kdh)
or you can damage your engine.
FIRST
(1):
This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND
(2).
You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If
the
shift lever is put in FIRST
(I),
the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice:
If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t
try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck
in
very deep sand or mud or were
up
against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle. Also,
if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your
brakes to hold your vehicle
in
position on a
hill.
2-24
Manual Transaxle Operation
1
3
5
2
4
R
This is your shift pattern.
The clutch must be fully
pressed in when shifting a
manual transaxle to
ensure the transaxle is
fully in gear.
Here's how
to
operate your transaxle:
FIRST
(1):
Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST
(1).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST
(1)
when you are going less
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST
(I),
put the
shift lever into NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
FIRST
(1).
+hot
9fl
mnh
(99
bmIh\.
!f
\In11
hqxm
rrnmn
+n
CJ
t-nmnlntn
LIIUL
LV
lllpll
\VL
1\11111~j
yuu
llLlSU
"WIIIU
L"
u
"Wlllyl-I"
SECOND
(2):
Press the clutch pedal as you let up
Then, slowly let up
on
the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Gr:
the
acceIeratGr
pedzl
2nd
shift
Intc
SECOND
(2).
THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4),
and FIFTH
(5):
Shift into
THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4)
and FIFTH
(5)
the same way
you do for SECOND
(2).
Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle
stops,
press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE
(R):
To back
up,
press down the clutch
pedal and lift up on the ring on the shift lever to shift into
REVERSE
(R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice:
Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle
is
stopped. Shifting into REVERSE
(R)
while
your vehicle
is
moving could damage your
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
. . .-
.-
a..
warrarlty.
Also, use REVERSE
(R),
along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
Once the shift lever is in REVERSE
(R),
the ignition can
be turned to OFF and the key removed.
2-25
Shift
Speeds
I
If
you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself
or
others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
Up-Shift Light
Parking Brake
ii
SHIFT
If
you have a manual
transaxle, you may have a
SHIFT light located on
the instrument panel
cluster. This light will show
you when to shift to the
next higher gear for
the best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear
if
the weather, road and traffic conditions
permit. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
Automatic Transaxle shown,
Manual Transaxle similar
To set the parking brake, pull up on the parking brake
handle.
If
the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on.
Brake System Warning
Light
on
page
3-28.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake handle up until you
can press the release button.
Hold the release button
in as you move the brake handle all the way down.
2-26
Notice:
Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts
of
your vehicle.
If
you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer
on
page
4-36.
1g
Inti
Park
(P)
2.
Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
It
can be dangerous
to
get
t
of yc
r
vehicle
if
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK
(P)
with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
6.E
p&
yt
:G#436;i’.
if
ye.;’;e
p6~w.~zg
If your vehicle
is
an automatic transaxle, do the following
to shift into PARK (P):
1.
Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Hold in the button on the shift lever.
Push the shift lever all the way toward the front
of
the vehicle.
3.
Turn the ignition key to
OFF.
4.
Remove the key and take it with you.
If
you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle
is
in PARK (P).
2-27
Leaving Your
Vehicle
With the
Enm‘ne Running
-L
can be ..mgerous tc -3ave your vehicle
\II
.-.I
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly
if
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK
(P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
And,
if
you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If
you have to leave your automatic transaxle model
vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is
in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set
before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see
if
you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK (P).
Torque
Lock
If
you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
automatic transaxle into PARK
(P)
properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.“ To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into
Park (P)
on
page
2-27.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK
(P)
before
you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of
Park
(P)
If
your vehicle has an automatic transaxle it has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have
to apply your regular brake before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in
ON.
See
Automatic
Transaxle Operation
on
page
2-22.
If
you cannot shift out of PARK
(P),
ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.)
2-28
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift Parking Over Things That Burn
out
of
PARK
(P),
try this:
1.
Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.
2.
Apply and hold the regular brake until the end of
3.
Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4.
Start the vehicle.
5.
Shift to the drive gear you want.
6.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Step
5.
Parking Your Vehicle/Key Removal
Before leaving your manual transaxle model vehicle,
fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shift lever into
REVERSE
(R)
and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed in REVERSE
(R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the
ignition key to
OFF,
remove the key and release the
clutch. See
Manual Transaxle Operation
on
page
2-25.
-,
,,,rigs
that can burn
COLJ
touc,,
.rot
ex..,ust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-29
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust can kill.
It
contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see
or smell.
It
can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
different.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust
is
coming into
your vehicle:
Drive
it
only with all the windows down to
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
blow out any CO; and
Running Your
Engine While
You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But
if
you
ever have to, here are some things
to
know.
Idling the engine with the climate control
system
off
could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if
the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust
-
with
CO
-
can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
“Winter Driving” in the Index.
2-30
It
can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever
is
not fully
in
PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
I
Follow
the proper steps
to
be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See
Shifting
Into
Park
(P)
on page
2-27.
If
you are parking on a hill and
if
you’re pulling a trailer,
also see
Towing a Trailer
on
page
4-36.
2-31
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, to adjust
the height
of
the mirror, adjust the arm that connects the
mirror to the windshield. Second, adjust the angle
of
the mirror, by moving the mirror to a position that allows
you to see out
of
the back window.
To
reduce glare from headlamps behind you, move the
lever toward you to the night position. To return the
mirror
to
the daytime position, move the lever away
from you.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted
so
you
can see a little
of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control lever
on the driver’s door.
To
adjust your passenger’s mirror, sit in the driver’s seat
and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you.
2-32
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has power
mirrors these controls
are located on the
driver’s door.
To choose the mirror you want to adjust by moving the
selector switch located above the four-way control
pad to the right or to the left. Then use the arrows on
the control pad
to
move the mirror in the desired
direction. Adjust each mirror
so
that you can see a little
comfortable driving position.
VI
LI
IG
JIUG
VI
YVUl
VGIIlblG
VVIIbII
YVU
Ulb
QlLLlllLJ Ill
U
n$
+hn
nidn
n$
.,nsnr
n,nh:nIn
%a,hnw.
nrn
-;++in-
;n
n
Outside
Convex
Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface
is
curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
A
convex mirror can make things (like
o
?r
vehicles)
look
farther away than they really are.
If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
2-33
Storage Areas
Glove
Box
To open,
pull
the glove
box
latch toward you.
Cupholder(s)
Pull down the door on the rear
of
the center console to
use the rear seat cupholders.
Center Console Storage Area
The center console has two separate storage areas. To
open, pull up on the lid.
2-34
Sunroof
If
your vehicle has this feature, the switch is located on
the headliner between the sun visors. The sunroof
will only operate when the ignition is in
ON.
The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or
it
can
be express-opened all of the way.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, you must first
open the sunshade by hand. Then push the switch
back and release it.
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch back again
and release it.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air
flow
can be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and
holding the switch forward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof
is
closed. The sunroof will stop
if
the switch is released during operation. Remember to
close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed
if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice:
Do not attempt to force the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel. Damage will
occur and the sunroof may not open or close
properly.
2-35
6
NOTES
2-36
Section
3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
...............................
3.4
Hazard Warning Flashers
..........
..............
3.6
Other Warning Devices
...................................
3.6
Horn
.............................................................
3.6
Tilt Wheel
.....................................................
3.7
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
.........................
3.7
Exterior Lamps
.............................................
3.13
Interior Lamps
..............................................
3.16
Accessory Power Outlets
...............................
3.17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
........................
3.18
Climate Controls
...........................................
-3-1 9
Climate Control System
.................................
3.19
Outlet Adjustment
.........................................
3.22
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
.............
3.23
Instrument Panel Cluster
................................
3.24
Speedometer and Odometer
...........................
3.25
Tachometer
.................................................
3.25
Safety Belt Reminder Light
.............................
3.26
Air
Eag
Reauiness
iighi
3-LW
Charging System Light
..................................
3.27
fi
cln
................................
Up-Shift Light
..............................
..........
3-28
Brake System Warning Light
........,
..........
3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System
Enhanced Traction System
Enhanced Traction System
Warning bight
........................................
3-29
Warning Light
...........................................
3-29
Active Light
..............................................
3-30
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
..................
3-31
Low Coolant Warning Light
............................
3-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
.............................
3-31
Oil Pressure Light
.........................................
3-34
Low Oil Level Light
.......................................
3-35
Security Light
...............................................
3-36
Cruise Control Light
......................................
3-36
%??:ice
‘!ehic!n
see!?
Light
...........................
._
2-36
Fuel Gage
...................................................
3-37
Change Engine Oil Light
................................
3-35
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
.....................
3-36
3-
1
Section
3
Instrument Panel
Audio
System(s)
.............................................
3.38
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS)
..................................
3.38
Setting the Time
for
Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS)
.........................................
3-38
Radio with CD (Base Level)
...........................
3-39
Radio with CD (Up Level)
..........
,
................
3.42
Radio with Cassette and CD
...
........
3.52
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
..........
....
3.64
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS
Radios) ......................
.............
3-64
Understanding Radio Reception
......................
3-65
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player ................. 3-65
Care of Your CDs
.........................................
3-66
Care
of
Your CD Player
................................
3-66
Backglass Antenna
.......................................
3-66
XM
Satellite Radio Antenna System
................
3-67
DAB Radio Antenna System
...........................
3-67
Chime Level Adjustment
.............................
3-67
3-2
cn
W
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks L. Cruise Control Switches
B. Air Outlets
C. Instrument Panel Cluster
D.
Hazard Warning Flasher Button
E.
Audio System
F. Climate Control System
G.
Side Window Defogger Vent
H. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped)
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel
J.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
K.
Hood Release Handle
M.
N.
0.
P,
Q
R
S
T.
Tilt Wheel Lever
Ignition Switch
Windshieid Wiperwasher Lever
Enhanced Traction System Button
Transaxle Shift Lever
Parking Brake
Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power Outlet
Accessory Power Outlet
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
off.
The hazard warning
flasher is located near
the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key
is
in, and even
if
the key isn't in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and
off. Press the button again
to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about
300
feet
(100
m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbol
on
your steering wheel.
3-6
Tilt Wheel
A
tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
your vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
I
I
To
tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and
pull
the lever
toward you. Then move the wheel
to
a comfortable
position and release
the
iever to iock the wheei
in
piace.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-pass
For information on the exterior lamps. See
Exterior
Lamps
on
page
3-13
later
in
this section.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction
of
the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change,
if
the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If
a bulb is burned out, replace
it
to
help avoid an
accident.
If
the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the
fuse. See
Fuses
and Circuit Breakers
on
page
5-81.
Turn Signal On Chime
If
your turn signal is left on for more than
3/4
of a mile
(1.2
km), a chime will sound at each flash
of
the
turn signal.
To
turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the
off position.
Headlamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning
chime.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signaVmultifunction lever away
from you.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster
will come on
if
the ignition
is in
ON.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want
to
pass.
To
use it, pull the turn signaVmultifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them
off.
Windshield
Wipers
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel
to
operate the windshield wipers.
OFF:
Move the lever to
OFF
to turn off the windshield
wipers.
INT
(Intermittent): Move the lever to INT
to
choose a
delayed wiping cycle. Turn the INT ADJ band down
for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay. The further
the INT ADJ band is turned upward, the shorter the
delay will be and the further the INT ADJ band is turned
downward, the longer the delay will be. The wiper
speed can only be adjusted when the lever is in the INT
position. Use this position for light rain or snow.
LO
(Low
Speed): Move the lever up
to
the first setting
past INT, for steady wiping at low speed.
HI
(High Speed): Move the lever up
to
the second
setting past INT, for steady wiping at high speed.
MIST:
Move the lever all the way down to MIST for a
single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield
wipers start; then let go. The windshield wipers will stop
after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on mist longer.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
damage, be sure
to
clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.
If
your blades
do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy
snow
or
Ice
can
overload
your
wiper
motor-
A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice
to
prevent an overload.
t---
-,-:,,
...
-
11
---..-.L
L-
-I.-:.,-
--&-I.,
T,
-.,-:A
IIUIII
~GGII
~y
VVGII
GI
wuy~
I
LW
UIIVC; aalC;;ly.
I
u
avulu
3-9
Windshield Washer
Cruise
Control
To
wash your windshield, push in the button at the end
0
er until the washers begin.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice
on
the windshield,
blocking your vision.
I
I
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe about three times or
will resume the speed you were using before.
1
If your vehicle has this feature, the cruise control
buttons are located on the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25
mph
(40
km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on
the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph
(40
km/h).
3-1
0
The cruise control will turn off when any of the
following occur:
The brakes are applied,
the clutch is applied (manual transaxle),
the parking brake is applied, or
the brake system warning light is on.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or
in
heavy traffic.
0
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery
roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system,
if
your vehicle has this feature, begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengx~e.
See
Enhanced
Trac?im
Sys?m
(ETSI
ar?
page
4-9.
When road conditions allow you to safely use
it
again,
you
may turn the cruise control back on.
:ing Cruise Contrc
If you leave your cruise control
on
when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch
off
until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Press the cruise control
ON
OFF
button. The
indicator light above the button will turn on.
2.
Get
up
to the speed you want.
3. Press the CST SET (Coast Set) button and release
it. The
CRUISE
light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on.
3-1 1
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset
it. Once you’re going about
25
mph
(40
km/h) or more,
you can press the cruise control RES ACCL
(Resume/Accelerate) button for about half a second.
You’ll
go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If
you press the RES ACCL button longer than half a
second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you
release the button or apply the brake.
So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold down the RES ACCL
button.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the CST SET button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll
now
cruise at the higher speed.
Press the RES ACCL button. Hold
it
there until you
get up to the speed you want, and then release the
button.
To
increase your speed in very small
amounts, press the RES ACCL button for less than
half a second and then release it. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will go about
1
mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pressing the CST SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Press the CST SET button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
CST SET button for less than half a second.
Each time you do this, you’ll go
1
mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot
off
the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-1
2
Using Cruise Control
on
Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or
shift
to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out
of
cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are five ways to turn
off
the cruise control:
Step on the brake pedal.
Press the cruise control CANCEL button.
Press the cruise control
RES
ACCL button and the
CST SET buttons at the same time.
Press the cruise control ON
OFF
button. The
indicator liqht above the cruise control button
will turn
of.
Push the clutch pedal
if
your vehicle has a manual
transaxle.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn
off
the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory
is
erased.
Exterior
Lamps
I
The lever on the left side
of
the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
-p-
(Exterior
Lamps):
Turn
the
outside
part
of
the
lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.
3-1
3
The exterior lamps control has three positions:
pf
(Parking
Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following.
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
-
-
EO
(Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
AUTO:
Turn the control to this position to turn the
headlamps, taillamps and parking lamps on and
off
automatically while the ignition is on, by sensing how
dark it is outside. For more information see Automatic
Headlamp System later in this section.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front
of
your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful
in
many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
The ignition
is
on.
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the parking
the light sensor detects daytime light,
lamps only position.
the parking brake is released, and
the shift lever is not in PARK
(P)
on vehicles with
When the DRL system
is
on,
the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As
with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
an automatic transaxle only.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel under the defroster grill,
so
be sure
it
is not covered which will cause the system
to be on whenever the ignition
is
on.
3-1
4
The system may also be on when driving through a
parking garage, heavy overcast weather or a tunnel.
This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the Automatic
Headlamp System
so
that driving under bridges or bright
overhead street lights does not affect the system. The
DRL
and Automatic Headlamp Systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than this delay.
To
idle your vehicle with the system
off,
set the parkin9
brake while the ignition is
off.
Then start the vehicle.
The system will stay
off
until you release the parking
brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
Headlamps
Off
in
PARK
(P)
To turn the headlamps
off
when it is dark outside, turn
the exterior lamps control
to
the parking lamp position.
In this position, the parking lamps, sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps and instrument panel
lights will be on, but the headlamps will be off.
To
turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamps control
to
the
AUTO
or headlamp position.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature will continue to
illuminate the headlamps for
20
seconds after the key is
turned to
OFF,
then the headlamps will automatically
turn off.
To override the
20
second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/muItifunction
lever up one position and then back
to
AUTO.
Fog
Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, the button for your fog
lamps is located on the instrument panel, to the left
of the steering wheel, beside the instrument panel
brightness thumbwheel.
When using the fog lamps, the ignition must be on as
well as the parking lamps or the low-beam headlamps.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the button will glow when the fog lamps are on.
Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
TI--
I--.
I
...
:I1
I
.....
LT
.
I.
.
.
I I
luy
I~III~
WIII
Lull1
UII
WII~II~V~I
iile
iliyil-bed1r1
headlamps are turned on. When the high beams
are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
3-1
5
Interior
Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
Move the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights and
down to dim them.
Entry/Exit Lighting
When you
lift
the driver’s door handle or open any door,
the lamps inside your vehicle will go on. These lamps
will fade out after about
10
seconds after all of the doors
have been closed or when the ignition is turned to
ON.
These lamps will also
go
on when you press the
trunk release, unlock symbol button or the horn symbol
on the remote keyless entry system transmitter
(if
equipped).
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
10
seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
Dome Lamp
The switch on this lamp has three positions. The
ON
position will turn on the light. The
DOOR
position
will turn on the light whenever a door is opened or when
the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel is moved
up. The
OFF
position will shut
off
the lamp completely,
even when a door is opened.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.
3-1 6
Battery
Run-Down
Protection
Your vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature
designed to protect your vehicle's battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, mirror reading lamps,
dome lamp or glove box) is left on when the ignition is
turned
off,
the battery saver system will automatically
shut the lamp
off after
20
minutes. This will avoid
draining the battery.
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB
radio.
I
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
I
Lift the driver's door handle,
open any door or
press any remote keyless entry transmitter button
(if
equipped),
press the power door
lock
switch,
press the remote trunk release or
turn the lamp that was left on to off and then to
on again.
The accessory power outlet is located to the left of the
glovebox on the lower side of the instrument panel
and behind a flip-out door.
Notice:
When using accessory power outlets the
maximum load should not exceed
15
amps. Be sure
to turn
off
any electrical equipment when not in
use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended
periods can drain the battery.
3-1
7
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If
you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice:
Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage
it
or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice:
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
To
use the lighter, just push it in
all
the way and let go.
Notices
Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes
or
other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
Notice:
Don’t hold
a
cigarette lighter in with your
hand while
it
is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make
it
overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
It
can also blow
the fuse.
3-1
8
Climate
Controls
Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Operation
Io
change the current mode, select one of the following:
2
(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
+2
(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the side windows.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side windows.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
@?
(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
a
(Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on or
off.
When this mode is on,
outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle. The
outside air mode can be used with all modes, but
it cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used
to
prevent outside
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode on or
off.
The
air-conditioning compressor will come on. The
recirculation mode cannot be used with the outside air
mode. Recirculation is not available when
in
the defog or
defrost modes or when the fan
is
off.
5i-d
UdUI-s
~IUI-II
er-lietirly
ywur
veilicie
ur
iw
ileip
i~eai
ur
3-1
9
When you switch to the defog or defrost modes the
system will automatically move from recirculation to
outside air. When you move the mode knob back to
another mode, the system will move back into
recirculation. When the car is turned off and back on the
system will default to outside air automatically.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle.
When it’s cold outside
0°F
(-18°C)
or lower, use the
engine coolant heater,
if
equipped, to provide warmer air
faster to your vehicle. An engine coolant heater warms
the coolant that the engine uses to provide heat to
warm the inside of your vehicle. For more information,
see
Engine Coolant Heater on page
2-20.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When
A/C
is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that air conditioning is activated.
The fan knob must be set to a speed for the air
conditioning to operate.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down
on
hot days:
1.
Select the vent mode.
2.
Select the highest fan speed.
3.
Select
A/C.
4.
Select the recirculation mode.
5.
Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle is cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air,
so
you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
3-20
+3
(Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield and most of the remaining air to the
floor outlets with a small amount directed at the side
windows. When you select this mode, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
To help clear the side windows quickly while using air
conditioning, do the following:
1.
Select the bi-level mode.
2.
Select the highest fan speed.
3.
Select
NC.
4.
Select the temperature.
9
(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield with some air directed to the floor
outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn
off
recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at
or
in the defrost mode.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
L-I
-...
r
”--- :-.-
ne-:
--..
I-&:-.-
I
I-
-
I-
_I_
-I
...
1.11-
uctuvv
tt
GGLII
ty.
ncx,lIbuIauuI
I
l,cu
II
161
ue
SeIe‘uttw
WI
III~
1.
Select the defrost mode.
2.
Select the outside air mode.
3.
Select the highest temperature.
4.
Select the highest fan speed.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
outlets located above the side instrument panel outlets.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
1.
Select the floor mode.
2.
Select the outside air mode.
3.
Select the highest temperature.
4.
Select the highest fan speed.
Rear
Window
Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Lut]
REAR:
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or
off.
An indicator light
in
the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much snow
from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn
off
approximately
10
minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning
off.
The defogger can also
be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning
off
the engine.
Notice:
Don’t use anything sharp on the inside
of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t
be
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to
the defogger grid.
cGvered
by
ycx:
warranty.
oc
not
attach a
temporaiy
3-2
1
Outlet Adjustment
Use the sliding levers on the air outlets located in the
center and on the sides of the instrument panel, to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation
Tips
a
a
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold or
cool weather can cause window fogging.
3-22
Warning Lights,
Gages
and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help
you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As
you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.
If
you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together
to
let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving,
or
when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about
it.
Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly
-
and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this cluster
or one very similar to it. It includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on the following pages. Be sure to read about them.
PO
RO
NO
DO
30
20
United States Automatic Transaxle Cluster shown, Manual Transaxle and Canada Clusters similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999
if
someone tries to
turn it back.
You may wonder what happens
if
your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then
it
must
be. But
if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
The reset button is located below the tachometer. To
reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold briefly the
ribbed side of the button while the trip odometer is
displayed.
Also,
by pressing this button for less than
one second you can toggle between the odometer and
the trip odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: Do
not operate the engine with the
tachometer
in
the red area, or engine damage
may occur.
3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to
ON
or
START,
a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If
the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air
Bag
Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you
if
there
is
an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the air bag system, see
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
on
page
1-53.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should
This means the
ready.
go
out.
system is
If
the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-26
Charging System Light
If the air bag readiness
light
stays on after you
start your vehicle,
it
means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags
in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash.
To
help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness
light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to
ON.
If
the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will
be ready to warn you
if
there is a problem.
4
The charging system light
will come on when you
turn on the ignition, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show you it
is working.
When the engine is running, the light should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving and you
hear a chime, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. It could indicate that you
have a loose generator drive belt or another electrical
problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while
this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn
off
all your accessories, such as the radio
2nd
2i!-
c93diti9ner.
3-27
Up-Shift Light
SHIFT
If
your manual transaxle
vehicle has this feature
this light comes on
when you need to shift to
the next higher gear.
See
Manual Transaxle
Operation on page
2-25.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If
the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
I
I
I
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to
ON.
If
it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed
so
it will be ready to warn you
if
there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on
if
your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If
the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop.
If
the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See
Towing
Your Vehicle on page
4-3
1.
Your brake system
r
y
not be working
properly
if
the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident.
If
the light is still
on after you’ve pulled
off
the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
I
3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
ANTI
-
LOCK
United States Canada
If your vehicle has the anti-lock brake system, the light
will come on when your engine is started and may
stay on for several seconds. That’s normal.
If
the light stays on, turn the ignition to
OFF.
Or,
if
the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition
off.
Then start the
engine again to reset the system.
If
the light still stays
on, or comes on aqain while Vou’re drivinq, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
section.
Brake
Sy~Sei~7 Viamj~~
Light
O/T
page
3-28
earlier
in
this
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to
ON.
This is
normal.
If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be ready to warn you
if
there is a problem.
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
TRAC
OFF
If
your vehicle has the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this warning light
should come on briefly as
you start the engine.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you
if
there’s a problem.
If
the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
I
raction system ana your venicie may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
-
3-29
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
If
you turn the system off by pressing the ETS
button on the center console near the gear
shift lever, the warning light will come on and stay
on. To turn the system back
on, press the button
again. The warning light should go
off. See
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS)
on
page
4-9
for
more information.
If
the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn
off and
the warning light will come on.
If
the vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road,
the warning light may come on momentarily but will
go off again when the vehicle leaves the rough
surface.
If
the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on and the parking brake is fully
released, your vehicle needs service.
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light
LOW
TRAC
If your vehicle has the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this light will
come on when the system
is
limiting wheel spin.
Slippery road conditions may exist
if
the Enhanced
Traction System active light comes on,
so
adjust your
driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes
on briefly when you turn the ignition key
to
ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
there to tell you when the system is active.
3-30
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
if
the gage
pointer moves into the red
area, the light comes
on and you hear a chime,
your engine
is
too hot.
It means that your engine
coolant has overheated.
See
Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
Low
Coolant Warning Light
1
This light comes on
briefly when you turn your
ignition on.
!f
this
!ight
comes
on
and stays on and
you
hear
a
chime, the coolant level in your vehicle is low.
See
Engine Coolant
on
page 5-23.
If
the light is on
along with an overheat warning, you may have a
serious overheating problem. See
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-31
listed previously.
Notice:
Damage to your engine from neglected
coolant problems can be costly and is not covered
by your warranty.
See
Engine Overheating on page 5-26
for information
on what
to
do. Your vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States
or
Check Engine Light in
Canada
17
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
II
I
I
I
United States Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
3-3
1
This system is called OBD
I1
(On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK
ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a
problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will
be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notices
If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notices
Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come
on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result
in
a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running.
If
the light doesn’t come on, have
it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction
in
one of two ways:
Light Flashing
-
A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
Light
On
Steady
-
An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
If
the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If
you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If
the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If
the Light Is On Steady’’ following.
3-32
If
the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so,
stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10
seconds and restart
the engine.
If
the light remains on steady, see
“If
the Light
Is
On Steady” following.
If
the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If
the Light
Is
On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If
so,
reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See
Filling
Your
Tank on page
5-7.
The
diagnostic system can determine
if
the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed.
A
loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light
off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out.
A
few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If
so,
be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You
may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
if
SU,
yuuI
&cti-ic&
~~~t6fi-1
i7-lZj
be
vvt;~.
I
I
IC
LUI
IUILIUI
I
...-
TL
-
--.-A:&:--
Gasc/i,qe
&fane
cfi
5-5.
fuel
quality
;&/iff
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If
you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use.
It
will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If
none of the above steps have made the light turn
off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your
\.lehic!e
wi!!
not
pass
this
inspectinn
if
the
SERV!CE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
3-33
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection
if
the
OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen it
you have recently replaced your battery or
if
your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving.
If
you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack
of
OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil
Pressure
Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on and you will hear
a chime when you are
driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
When the ignition is on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as a test to show you it is working,
but the light will go out when the engine is running. If
it doesn’t come on with the ignition
on,
you may have a
problem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.
Don’t keer ing
if
the oil pressi..
-
is low.
If
you do, your engine can become
so
hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and
is
not covered by
your warranty.
3-34
Low
Oil Level Light
LOW
OIL
If
your vehicle is equipped
with a
3400
V6
engine,
then you
will
have a LOW
OIL
light in your
instrument panel cluster.
This light will come on briefly when you start your
vehicle.
If
the light stays on after starting your vehicle, or comes
on and chimes while you are driving, your engine
oil
level should be checked.
Prior to checking the oil level, be sure your vehicle has
been shut
off
for several minutes and is on a level
surface. Check the oil level on your dipstick and bring it
to the proper level. See
Engine Oil on page
5-15.
The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level
during the brief period between when the key is on and
the engine is cranking. It does not monitor engine oil level
when the engine is running. Additionally, an oil level
check is only performed
if
the engine has been turned
off
for a considerable period of time allowing the oil normally
in circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
Change Engine
Oil
Light
CHANGE
OIL
The CHANGE
OIL
light
should come on briefly as
a bulb check when you
start the engine. If the light
'
doesn't come on, have it
~ serviced.
I
I
If
the CHANGE
OIL
light comes on and stays on after
you start the engine, have the oil changed.
To reset the CHANGE
OIL
light, see
Engine Oil
on
page
5-
15.
3-35
Security Light
SECURITY
This light will come on
when you turn the key to
ON
and will stay on
until the vehicle starts.
If you’re driving and the security light comes on and
remains on, your Passlock@ system is not working
properly. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock@
and you should see your dealer.
Cruise Control Light
CRUISE
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control,
if
equipped.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
LOW
WASHER
FLUID
United States Canada
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition. It will also stay on, or come on and a chime will
sound,
if
the windshield washer fluid reservoir
is
less
than one-third full.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
SERVICE
VEHICLE
SOON
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition
to
ON.
3-36
It
will
stay on, or come on and a chime will sound
if
it
detects a problem on the vehicle, such as a Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) or an automatic headlamp
system malfunction. If this happens, see your dealer as
soon as possible.
Fuel
Gage
United States Canada
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, the light will come on and you will hear a chime.
You still have a little fuel left, but you should get
more soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
e
e
e
e
At the service station, the gas pump shuts
off
before the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to
fill
up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill
the tank.
The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
The gage goes back to empty when you turn
off the
ignition.
3-37
Audio
System(s)
Nofice:
Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle
-
like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio
-
be sure you can
add what you want.
If
you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation
of
sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure.
You
will get
the most enjoyment out of it
if
you acquaint yourself with
it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting
the most out of the advanced engineering that went
into
it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition
is
turned
off.
See
Retained
Accessory Power under
Ignition Positions on
page
2-
17.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press the HR arrow until the correct hour appears
on the display. Press and hold the MIN arrow until
the correct minute appears. The time may be set with
the ignition on or
off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR or MIN for two seconds. Then press
and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM or PM will also appear. Press and hold MIN
until the correct minute appears on the display. The
time may be set with the ignition on or
off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold HR and MIN at the same time for two seconds until
UPDATED appears on the display.
If
the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display instead.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes before pressing and holding the
HR
and
MIN buttons will result in an update to the time.
3-38
Radio
with
CD
(Base
Level)
Playing
the
Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and
off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL
(Recall):
Press this knob to switch the display
between time and radio station frequency. Time display
is available with the ignition turned
off.
Finding a Station
AM
FM:
Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE:
Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
a
SEEK
D
:
Press the right or the left arrow to tune
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds and flash
the station frequency, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are
in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
3-39
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations.
You
can set up to
18
stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1.
Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM
FM
to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO:
To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS or TRE
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to increase or to decrease.
If
a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select BAS
or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero
or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to
the middle position, first end out of audio mode by
pressing another button, causing the radio to perform that
function, or by waiting five seconds for the display to
return to time of day. Then press and hold the AUDIO
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
CEN will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO:
To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
press and release the AUDIO button until FAD
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up or
the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep.
L
and a zero
or
F
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time
of
day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
3-40
Radio Messages
CAL
(Calibration): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If
CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealership for service.
LOC
(Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The
display will show CD. If you want to insert a compact
disc with the ignition
off, first press RCL or the eject
button.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1
PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previuus
ira&
ii
iile
currerli
ira&
ilas
beer1
piayirly
for less than eight seconds.
If
pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it
will
go to the beginning of the current track. The track
number will appear on the display.
If
you hold the
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc.
2
NEXT: Press this pushbutton to
go
to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display.
If
you
hold the pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the disc.
3
REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
reversing.
4
FWD
(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
forwarding.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RND
will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn
off
random play. OFF will appear on the display.
6
RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
display.
ayail.1
iu
~UIII
uii
repeated
pky.
ur-r
WIII
dppe&I
61-1
the
nt-t-
.
.
.:II
-
.-
.-
a
SEEK
D
:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track. The track number
will appear on the display.
RCL
(Recall): Press this knob to see the current track
number
or
how long the current track has been playing.
3-41
AM
FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in the
player.
CD: With a compact disc in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play the compact disc. CD
will appear on the display.
4
(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off
if
this
button is pressed first.
Compact
Disc
Messages
If the disc comes out,
it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid.
If
so,
wait about an hour and
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
normal, the disc should play.
try again.
If
the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If
any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio
with
CD
(Up
Level)
Radio Data System
(RDS):
Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on
FM
stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of
receive announcements concerning local and
programming,
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek
to
stations with traffic announcements.
3-42
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. in rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features
to
work improperly.
If
this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency.
RDS
stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name
of
the program being
broadcast.
XMTM Radio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTM is a
continental
U.S. based satellite radio service that
offers 100 coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name.
A
service fee is
required in order to receive the XMTM service. For more
information, contact XMTM at www.xmradio.com or
call 1 -800-852-XMXM (9696).
uigitai Audio Broadcast jWBj (Canada wniyj: DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.
Playing
the
Radio
POWER: Push this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
SCOFF (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCOFF,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED
or
MAX. Each higher choice allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then. as vou drive, SCOFF automaticallv increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at
any speed. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use
SCOFF, select OFF.
3-43
RCL
(Recall):
Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition
off
will display
the time.
For XMTM (USA only,
if
your radio is equipped with
XMTM Satellite Radio Service), pressing this button while
in XMTM mode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing
and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve
four different categories of information: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
NumberKhannel Name.
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND:
Press this button to switch between AM, FMI,
FM2, or XMI, XM2 (USA only,
if
your radio is
equipped with XMTM Satellite Radio Service) or DAB1 or
DAB2 (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB). The display will show your selection.
TUNE:
Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L
with a number next to it
(1
through
23).
Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display
will
show your selections.
<
SEEK
>
:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-44
<
SCAN
>
:
Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep
and the P will blink with the preset number. The radio
will go to the first preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio
will
scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to
30
stations (six AM,
six FM1 and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA
Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only,
if
your
radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
Gi.i[.y.,
if
.y.zlui-
rzd;G
is
i;-le
y"!'"
Saieiiiie
1.
Turn the radio on.
3.
Press BAND
to
se!ect
AM,
FM!
or
FM2,
or
XM!,
XM2, or DAB1, DAB2.
3.
Tune in the desired station.
4.
Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear
a
beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Press and release this button until BASS, MID
or TREB appears on the display. Press the knob
above the AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the knob
to increase or to decrease.
If
a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least
two seconds will return all tone settings, including
baiance ana iaae,
io
iiai.
AUTO
EQ
(Automatic Equalizer): Press this button to
choose bass, midrange and treble equalization
settings designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical program types.
3-45
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Press the knob
above the AUDIO button to extend
it,
then turn the
knob to move the sound toward the left or the right
speakers.
To adjust fade between the front and the rear speakers,
press and release the AUDIO button until FAD
appears
on
the display. Press the knob above the
AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the knob to move
the sound to the front and the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least two
seconds will return all tone settings, including bass
and treble, to flat.
Finding a
PTY
Station
(RDS,
XMTM
and DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed
on
the screen.
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4.
If
you want
to
go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either
SEEK
arrow once.
If
the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5.
If
PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step
1.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed on
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
particular section.
the screen.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at
a
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF
ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds
to
turn alternate frequency
off.
AF
OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for
XMTM
or DAB.
3-46
Setting
Preset
PTYs
(RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1
Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
3.
Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one
of
the six numbered
select mode.
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5.
Repeat the steps
for
each pushbutton.
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even
if
the volume is muted
or
a compact disc
is
playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display
if
the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If
the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
it
will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the
display,
3-47
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button
is
pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD, or
XMTM,
or DAB station. Press the
TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the
display. When a traffic announcement comes on
the station that was found, you will hear
it.
When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD, or
XMTM,
or DAB station. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
INFO (Information):
If
the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If
the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until
a
new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
3-48
XMTM
Radio Messages
Radio
Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
Updating
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating encryption
code
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling
1
-800-852-XMXM (9696).
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take
no
longer
than 30 seconds.
No
Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
I
CH Off Air
Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay)
text data.
No
action
is
needed. This message should
Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
~~
disappear shortly.
channel.
CH
Unavail
No Info
I
Channel no longer
I
This previously assigned channel
is
no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station.
It
this station was one
ot
your
Song/Program Title not
No
song title information is available at this time on this
available channel. Your system is working properly.
3-49
XMTM
Radio
Messages
(cont’d)
-
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
I
Not
Found
XM Locked
Category Name not
No category information is available at this time on this
available
channel. Your system is working properly.
No
TexVlnformational
No
text or informational messages are available at this
message available
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
No channel available for
There are no channels available for the category you
the chosen category
selected. Your system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes,
XM
receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio
ID
Radio
ID
label
(channel
0)
Unknown
Radio
ID not known
(should only be
if
hardware failure)
If you tune to channel
0,
you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio
8
digit radio
ID
label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~
If you receive this message when you tune to channel
0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
~ ~~~ ~~~
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period
of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-50
Playing
a
Compact
Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is
off,
first press the eject button or the RCL
knob.
If
you insert a CD with the radio
off
and the
ignition on,
it
will start to play.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed.
If
you select an
EQ
setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If
an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages’’ later in this section.
1
REV
(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
2
Fwn
{Fw!!!!zrt!):
Press
2nd
hn!d
fhk
pnchh!ttC)r?
t!
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
4
RDM
(Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
AUTO
EQ (Automatic Equalizer): Press AUTO
EQ
to
select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a compact disc. See “AUTO
EQ”
listed previously for more information.
<
SEEK
>
:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track
if
more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to
go
to the next track.
If
you hold either button or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving backward or forward
through the disc.
<
SCAN
>
:
Press and hold either arrows for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The disc will
go to the next track, play for
a
few seconds, th-an
go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL
(Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing,
EL TM will appear on the display.
BAND:
Press
this
buttm
tG
liste::
tG
the
radio
when
a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
n_
+Ln
.J:-”.1-.,
{+“--I,
^I
^I,,,,A
a:--\
.-..-I-
at--
VI
I
11
IG
ulaplay
\LI
acIn
VI
c1apr;u
111
I
IG),
pu31
I
11
IG
3-5
1
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display.
A
(Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off
if
this
button is pressed first.
Compact Disc Messages
CHECK
CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
Radio
with
Cassette and CD
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
The air
is
very humid.
If
so,
wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If
your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System
(RDS).
RDS
features are available for use only on
FM
stations that
broadcast
RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
receive announcements concerning local and
programming,
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-52
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly.
If
this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name
or
the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency.
RDS
stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XMTM
Radio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTM is a
continental
US.
based satellite radio service that
offers
100
coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee
is
required in order to receive the XMTM service. For more
information, contact XMTM at www.xmradio.com or
call
1
-800-852-XMXM
(9696).
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada
Only):
DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in
the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.
Playing
the
Radio
POWER:
Press this knob to turn the system
on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
I
I
ICI
I,
as
yUU
drive,
abv
auivrrlaiicaiiy
increases ine
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive.
If
you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
TL
^-
n-t
I
3-53
RCL
(Recall):
Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition off
Will
display
the time.
For XMTM (USA only,
if
your radio is equipped with
XMTM Satellite Radio Service), pressing this button while
in XMTM mode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing
and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve
four different categories of information: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
NumberEhannel Name.
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To
change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
Finding
a
Station
BAND:
Press this button to switch between
AM,
FM,
FM2, or XMI
,
XM2
(USA
only,
if
your radio is equipped
with XMTM Satellite Radio Service) or DABI, DAB2
(Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with DAB). The
display will show your selection.
TUNE:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L
with a number next to it
(1
through
23).
Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency
to
gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display will
show your selections.
<
SEEK
>
:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are
in
the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-54
<
SCAN
>
:
Press and hold either arrow for two
seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep
and the P will blink with the preset number. The radio
will
go
to the first preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return
to
your
favorite stations. You can
set
up to
30
stations (six AM,
six
FMI
and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA
Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only,
if
your
radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
m1\/,
if
\/fly
rdi~
ql_lir"p&
).!"lit.c!
?$ATM
ss:c!!$e
1.
Turn the radio on.
2.
Press BAND to select AM,
FMI
or FM2, or XMl,
XM2, or DABI, DAB2.
3.
Tune in the desired station.
4.
Press AUTO EQ
to
select the equalization.
5.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will
also
be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassmreble)
AUDIO:
Press and release the AUDIO button until
BASS, MID or TREB appears on the display. Press the
knob above the AUDIO button
to
extend
it,
then turn
the knob
to
increase or to decrease.
If
a station
is
weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least
two seconds will return
all
tone settings, including
ljaiar
1c;e
ar~d
fade
io
iiai.
AUTO
EQ
(Automatic
Equalizer):
Press this button to
choose bass, midrange and treble equalization
settings designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical program types.
3-55
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust balance between the right and
the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO button
until BAL appears
on
the display. Press the knob
above the AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the knob
to move the sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears on the display. Press the knob above the
AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the knob to
move the sound toward the left or the right speakers.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least two
seconds will return all tone settings, including bass
and treble to flat.
Finding a
PTY
Station
(RDS,
XMTM
and
DAB)
To
select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press either
on the screen.
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4.
If you want to go
to
another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once.
If
the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then
to
go to another station.
5.
If
PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step
1.
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
category by performing the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed on
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
particular section.
the screen.
4.
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
3-56
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency
off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for
XMTM
or DAB.
Setting Preset
PTYs
(RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode.
Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set
will
return.
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even
if
the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc
is
playing.
If
the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO
(Information):
If
the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
i-epeaidiy.
A
II~W
yruup
ui
wvr&
wiii
appear
on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station
is tuned to.
5.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-57
TRAF
(Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display
if
the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear
it.
If
the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you
will
hear it.
If
no station is found,
NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
For DAB (Canada only,
if
your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a cassette, CD, or XMTM, or DAB station.
Press the TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements. When the
radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF
will
appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will
resume play of the cassette, CD, or XMTM, or DAB
station.
If
no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear
on the display.
3-58
XMTM
Radio
Messages
indicates
content with
3-59
XMTM
Radio
Messages
(cont’d)
Radio
Display
Message
I
No
Info
I
Not
Found
XM Locked
Radio
ID
Unknown
L
Chk XMRcvr
Action
Required
3-60
Playing
a
Cassette
Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are
so
thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right.
If
the ignition is on, but the radio is
off,
the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If
you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not
be in squarely. Press the eject button, located next to
the cassette tape slot, to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, POWER,
AUDIO, AUTO EQ, and the SEEK controls just as
you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and
an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. The
tape player automatically begins playing the other
side when it reaches the end of the tape.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If
you want to insert a
tape while the ignition
is
off,
first press the button with
the eject symbol on it or the RCL knob.
ii
an error appears on tne rauio uispiay, the tape won’t
play because of an error. See “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1
REV
(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. You
may select stations during reverse operation by using
TUNE, SEEK and SCAN.
2
FWD
(Forward):
Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. You may select stations during
reverse operation by using TUNE, SEEK and SCAN.
5
SIDE:
Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
AUTO
EQ
(Automatic
Equalizer): Press AUTO EQ to
select the desired equalization setting while playing
a cassette tape. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a cassette tape. See “AUTO EQ”
listed previously for more information.
<
SEEK
>
:
Your tape must have at least three
seconds
of silence between each selection for seek to
the next or the previous selection on the tape. You can
skip as many as nine selections up or down on the
tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip,
then press the right or left SEEK arrows that many
times. The number of selections to be skipped
wiii
appear
on the dispiay.
,l,Arl,
rnee
thm
.-;-ht
+h,,
I.4t
--I-...
+-
---,-L.
C--
mnwl
I\.
Prbad
La
aci
I
ryt
II
uI
u
IC
1Gl1
altuvv
tu
at;alu
I
IuI
3-61
<
SCAN
>
:
Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN
appears on the display. The tape will go to the next
selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button
to
listen to the radio when a
cassette tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TP
CD
(TAPE): Press this button to play a cassette
tape or a CD when listening to the radio. Press TP CD
to switch between the tape and compact disc
if
both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening. The display will
show the TAPE and CD symbols.
A
(Eject): Press this button, located next to the
cassette tape slot, to eject
a
tape. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio
off.
Cassettes
may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off
if
this
button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
If
an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it
could be for one of the following reasons:
TIGHT TAPE: When this message is displayed, the
tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs.
Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down
and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not
turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should
not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure
your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE:
If
this message is displayed, the tape
is broken. Try a new tape.
WRAPPED: When this message is displayed, the tape
is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the
cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN PLAYR (Clean Player): This message may
also appear on the radio display to indicate that
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon
as
possible
to prevent damage to the tapes and player. For
additional information see
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape
Player on page
3-65.
If
any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If
your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-62
Playing a Compact Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is
off,
first press the eject button or the
RCL knob.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed.
If
you select an
EQ
setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
As
each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If
an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1
REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track.
You
will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
2
FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced voiume. Helease
it
to
play the passage. The
display
will
show elapsed time.
4
RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press
this
pushbution
again
io
turn
off
ranciom
mode.
AUTO
EQ
(Automatic Equalizer): Press this button to
select the desired equalization setting while playing a
compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a compact disc. See “AUTO
EQ”
listed previously for more information.
<
SEEK
>
:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track
if
more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If
you hold this button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the disc.
<
SCAN
>
:
Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN
appears on the display. The disc will go to the next
track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next track. SCAN and the track number will appear on
the display. Press this button again to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing.
To
change the default
on the display (track
or
elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing,
EL
TM will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD
is piaying.
3-63
TP
CD
(Tape):
Press this button to play a cassette
tape or a CD when listening to the radio. Press TP CD
to switch between the tape and compact disc
if
both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening. The display will
show the
TAPE and CD symbols.
4
(Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio
off.
CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off
if
this
button is pressed first.
Compact
Disc
Messages
CHECK
CD:
If
this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out,
it
could be one of the
following reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0
The air is very humid. If
so,
wait about an hour and
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
try again.
If
the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If
your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK@ is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If
the radio is moved to a different vehicle,
it
will
not
operate and LOC will be displayed.
With THEFTLOCK@ activated, your radio will not
operate
if
stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK@ is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
It
the radio is moved to a different vehicle,
it
will
not
operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@ is armed.
With THEFTLOCK@ activated, your radio will not operate
if
stolen.
3-64
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise
if
you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about
10
to
40
miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
XMTM
Satellite Radio Service
XMTM Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with Satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and
so.
Your radio
may
display
“NO SIGNAL” to indicate interference.
DAB
Radio
DAB
gives you digital radio reception. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with radio signals,
causing the sound to come and go. Your radio
may display “NO
SIGNAL”
to indicate interference,
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
A
tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.
If
they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50
hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
PLAYR to indicate that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
If
this message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean
it
as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player.
If
you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see
if
the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If
this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
WGUI
III
ty
baaacttc
VVILI
I
paua
VVI
IILI
I
X,IUIJ
LI
te
tape
nlhnn;,..r*
,-..-..-.--++e
...
:rL
...-A-
..,L:-L
*I-
-
I-.-
-
3-65
The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged
tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from
being ejected, use the following steps.
1.
Turn the ignition on.
2.
Turn the radio
off.
3.
Press and hold the TP CD button for five seconds.
4.
Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5.
Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type
of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYR
indicator. The radio will display CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care
of
Your
CDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust.
If
the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean
it,
wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your
CD
Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Backglass Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear
window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure
that the inside surface of the rear window is not
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged.
If
the inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception.
3-66
Notice; Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside
of
the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that
is
sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability
to pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t
be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception.
XM
Satellite Radio Antenna System
Your XMTM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your
XM
system may be affected if
your sunroof is open.
DAB Radio Antenna System
Your DAB antenna is located on the roof of your
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build
up for clear radio reception.
If
your vehicle is purchased in Canada and driven into
the United Stated the DAB radio antenna system will
not function. DAB radio reception is available in
Canada only.
The performance of your DAB antenna may be affected
if
your sunroof is open.
Chime
Level Adjustment
Chime level adjustment is only available on RDS radios.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. The chime is
produced from the driver’s side front door speakers.
To change the volume level, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The chime volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and
LOUD
will be displaved on the
radio. To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton
6
again. The chime level
will change from the loud level to normal, and
NORMAL
will be displayed. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the
new volume selected.
Removing
the
radio
and
net
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
3-67
Section
4
Driving
Your
Vehicle
Your Driving.
the
Road.
and
Your
Vehicle
..........
4-2
Defensive Driving
...........................................
4.2
Drunken Driving
.............................................
4.2
Control of a Vehicle
........................................
4-5
Braking
.........................................................
4-6
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS)
.....................
4-9
Steering
......................................................
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
.......................................
4-12
Passing
.......................................................
4-13
Loss of Control
.............................................
4-14
Driving at Night
............................................
4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
..................
4-17
City Driving
..................................................
4.20
Freeway Driving
..........................................
-4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
.......................
4-22
Highway Hypnosis
.......................................
-4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads
................................
4-23
Winter Driving
..............................................
4-25
If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
..............................................
4-29
lowing Your Vehicle
.....................................
4-31
Recreational Vehicle lowing
...........................
4-31
Loading Your Vehicle
....................................
4-34
lowing a Trailer
........................................
4-36
Towing
..........................................................
4-31
4- 1
Your Driving,
the
Road, and
Your
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See
Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page
1-9.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task
-
such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor
-
makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Judgment
0
Muscular Coordination
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving.
In
recent years, more than
16,000
annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000
people injured.
4-2
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage
of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number
of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at
0.08
percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is
0.05
percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States
is
0.04
percent.
The BAC will be over
0.10
percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour).
Of
course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive
is
affected well below a BAC
of
0.10
percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05
percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05
percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05
percent or above.
A
driver with a BAC level of
0.06
percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of
0.10
percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is
12
times greater; at a
level of
0.15
percent, the chance is
25
times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.
No
amount
of
coffee or number
of
cold
showers will speed that up.
“1’11
be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What
if
there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
4-4
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking
-
driver or passenger
-
is in a
crash, that person’s chance
of
being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if
the person had
not been drinking.
Control
of
a
Vehicle
You
have three systems that make your vehicle
go
where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator.
All
three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
I
,,inking and then driving
is
very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and judgement can be affected by even
a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious
-
or even fatal
-
collision if you drive
after drinking. Please don’t drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
designate
a
driver who will
not
drink.
h~m~
i~
8
cab;
cr
if
agnma’mn
...;+I-
-
----.-
~VU
nb
vw~wr
a
y~
VU~,
I
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more
of those control systems than the
control
of
your vehicle.
Also
see
Enhanced
Traction
System
(ETS) on
page
4-9.
tires
and
:cad
car:
prwidz.
That
means
you
can
lose
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves
perception time
and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s
perception time.
Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s
reaction time.
Average
reaction time
is about
3/4
of
a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.
So
do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in
3/4
of
a
second, a vehicle moving
at
60
mph
(1
00
km/h) travels
66
feet
(20
m).
That could
be a lot
of
distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough
space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount
of
brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts
-
heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking
-
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster
if
you do a lot of heavy braking.
If
you keep
pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.
If
you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down.
If
your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use
it
when you brake. Once the power
assist is used
up,
it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock
Brake
System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS
is
an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
ANTI
-
LOCK
United States
Canada
If
your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on
the instrument panel
will
come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
4-6
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test
is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with
ABS:
A
computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If
one of the wheels is about
to
stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
4-7
Using Anti-Lock
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance.
If
you get too close to the
vehicle
in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes
if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If
you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However,
if
you don’t have anti-lock,
your first reaction
-
to hit the brake pedal hard and hola
it down
-
may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’t respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be
off
the road, into the very thing you
were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
4-8
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels.
If
you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease
off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control.
If
you
do
have
anti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brakes.”
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Enhanced
Traction
System
(ETS)
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if
it senses that one or both
of
the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
I
This light will come on
when your Enhanced
Traction
Slmtem
is
!irniting
wheel spin. See
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light on page
3-30.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If
your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See ‘Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See
Automatic Transaxle Operation
on
page 2-22.
TRAC
OFF
When the system is on
and the parking brake is
fully released, this warning
light will come on to let
you know
if
there’s a
problem.
See
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on
page 3-29.
When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To
limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
Traction System on. But you can turn the system
off
if
you prefer.
ca?dltic?ns,
you
should
alwa‘js
leave
the
Enhanced
4-9
To turn the system on or
off,
press the
ETS
button
on the center console.
When you turn the system
off,
the Enhanced Traction
System warning light will come on and stay on.
If
the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button to turn the system
off,
the warning light will come on and the indicator light
will
go off
-
but the system won’t turn off right away. It
will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit
wheel spin.
You
can turn the system back on at any time
by
pressing the button again. The Enhanced Traction
System warning light should go
off.
Steering
Power
Steering
If
you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning,
you
can steer but
it
will take much more effort.
Steering
Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at
a
reasonable speed.
A
lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each
of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels.
If
there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
4-1
0
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems
-
steering and braking
-
have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
The same thing can happen
if
you’re steering through
a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems
-
steering and acceleration
-
can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control. See
Enhanced Traction
System
(ETS)
on
page
4-9.
What should you do
if
this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If
you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try
to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a
hill
and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right
in
front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking
-
if
you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action
-
steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes
-
but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See
Braking
on
page
4-6.
It
is
better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.
If
you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full
180
degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road
Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
If
the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the
accelerator and then,
if
there is nothing in the way,
steer
so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-1
2
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again.
A
simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.
A
miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents
-
the head-on collision.
So
here are some tips for passing:
0
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns.
If
you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A
broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never
cross
=r
so!id
!he or!
your
side
of
the
lane
or
a double solid line, even
if
the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
0
Do
not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially
if
you’re following a larger
vehicle.
Also,
you won’t have adequate space
if
the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way
is
clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And
if
something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If
other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-1
3
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A
cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember:
It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do
not have the Enhanced Traction System, or
if
the system
is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot
off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go.
If
you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid
if
it occurs.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route
or
area of
less danger.
4-1
4
Of
course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
Driving
at Night
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues
-
such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface”
-
and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If
you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid.
If
you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
.A
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
are rolling, you will have steering control. impaired
-
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
...
Le-
..-..
Le..-
A-
-Le-
-..AA--l..
A-
I---
^^
IL-
...
L--l-
VVI
IGfI
YUU
I
IaVG
LU
31Up
3UUUGI
Ily.
fi3
IUI
IY
63
11
It;
VVI
lGGl3
An,-,
rnmpnn
ia-
thrrt
a-nmn
AriItnrp
-srn
l;i,nlt,
tn
hn
VI
Ib
IbU.2WI
I
1.2
LI
IUC
.2VIII~
UIIVbl.2
UlCI
III\bIy
cv
Ub
problems, or by fatigue.
4-1
5
Here are some tips on night driving.
e
e
e
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If
you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No
one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example,
if
you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But
if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust
to
the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean
-
inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier
to
pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness
-
the inability to see in dim light
-
and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-1
6
Driving
in
Rain and on
Wet
Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And,
if
your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious
if
rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The sustace may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if
your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-1
7
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But
if
you can't, try to slow down before you
hit them.
-Yet
bl_.__
es can cause acJents. They wc..
t
work as well
in
a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control
of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of
water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.
So
much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen
if
the road is wet enough and
you're going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning,
it
has little or
no
contact with the road.
4-1
8
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it
can
if
your Driving Through Flowing Water
tires do not have much tread or
if
the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen
if
a lot of water is standing
on the road.
If
you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when
it
is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice:
If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that
is
slightly lower than
the
underbody
of
your vehicle.
If
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Fla
ng
or rushi
-
ater creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away.
As
little as
six inches
of
flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
e
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires
on
page
5-53.
4-1
9
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them.
You’ll
want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to
traffic signals.
Here are ways
to
increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities.
You’ll
save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A
traffic
light is there because the corner is
busy
enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check
both
ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
4-20
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or supernignwaysj are
ine
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic iiow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway.
If
you have a clear view
of
the freeway
as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate
if
it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well
in
advance.
If
you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
4-2
1
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed
is
usually posted. Reduce your speed
according
to
your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend
to
think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try
to
be well rested.
If
you
must start when you’re not fresh
-
such as after a day’s
work
-
don’t plan to make
too
many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?
If
you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to
go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing
to
help
if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Is the reservior full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades:
Are they in good shape?
Lamps:
Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires:
They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts:
What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time
to
avoid a major storm system?
Maps:
Do
you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you!
If
it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in
less than a second,
and you could crash and
be injured.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:
Have you checked
all levels?
4-22
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
e
e
e
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If
you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service
or
parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Hill
and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
dri\/iy
Y
i~
f!&
cy
+!inn
tnrrain
3
--..I....
4-23
If
you drive regularly
in
steep country, or
if
you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
I
ou don’l down,
1
ir
brakes cou.-. get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a
hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL
(N)
or with the
ignition
off
is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work
of
slowing down. They could
get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a
hill.
You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
e
e
e
e
Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As
you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like
a
stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-24
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape tor winter.
You may want
to
put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece
of old carpet or a couple
of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
-l-LL
-.--I
-
--..-Ir
-x
-,.SI--+:.,-
+v:nnmlnc
wuu
I
a1
Iu
a
t,uuplc
uI
ImltuIvc
vval
I
19
lul
tylbd.
AA,
if
4-25
Driving
on
Snow
or
Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However,
if
there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a
lot
less traction or “grip” and will need
to
be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing
(32°F;
OOC)
and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition
-
smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow
-
drive with caution.
Keep your Enhanced Traction System on.
It
will improve
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll
want
to
slow down and adjust your driving
to
the
road conditions. See
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS)
on
page
4-9.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to brake very gently,
too.
(If
you do have anti-lock,
see
Braking on page
4-6.
This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if
you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
4-26
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake
so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake
so
your wheels always keep rolling and you can still
steer.
Whatever your braking system,
allow
greater
following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear.
If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake befor2 you are on
it.
Try
not
to
brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
If
You’re Caught
in
a
Blizzard
If
you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow.
seri”us
siiuaii”r,.
‘T’uu
si-,uui~
pi-u~a~u~.y.
stZly
LL’jt;?
4-27
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If
you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats
-
anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO
could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see
it
or
smell
it,
so
you might not know
it
is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base
of
your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-28
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
If
You Are Stuck:
In
Sand,
Mud,
fuel. When you run the engine,
make
it
go
a
iiliie
faster than iust idle. That is, push the accelerator Ice
or
Snow
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
for signaling later
on
with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or
so until help comes.
_~OU
let your tires spin
__
-..gh
speed, they
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts
of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph
f55
km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
can
expbde,
and
you
or
others
could
be
4-29
Notice:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires.
If
you spin the
wheels
too
fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle
To
Get
It
Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire
Chains
on
page
5-60.
Rocking Your Vehicle
To
Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE
(R)
and a forward gear
(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST
(1)
or
SECOND
(2)
and REVERSE
(R)),
spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
H
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,
you
may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed
out
see “Towing Your Vehicle’’ following.
4-30
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page
7-5.
If
you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page
4-31.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle
-
such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as
a
i’dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
What’s the towing capacity
of
the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want
to
make
sure
your
vehicle
is
prepared to be
towed. See
Before Leaving on a
Long
Trip
on
page
4-22.
4-31
Dinghy Towing
To
tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground,
follow these steps:
I
L
m
1.
Position the vehicle
to
tow and then secure it.
2.
Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3.
Set the parking brake
4.
To
prevent your battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuses from the left side instrument panel fuse block:
WIPER, PCM ACC and IPC/BFC ACC. See
“Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Driver’s Side)” under
Fuses
and
Circuit
Breakers on page
5-81
for the
location
of
these fuses.
5.
Turn the ignition switch
to
ACCESSORY.
6.
Shift your transaxle
to
NEUTRAL
(N).
7.
Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the fuses once you reach your
destination. To reinstall a fuse do the following:
1.
Set the parking brake.
2.
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3.
Put the fuse back in
4-32
Notice: Make sure that the towing speed does not
exceed
65
mph
(1
10
km/h), or your vehicle could
be badly damaged.
Dolly
Towing
To
tow your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
a dolly, do the following:
Notice:
Do
not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
!?!!X!d
!?e!
he
Pn~!PlPc!
by
;mL!r
wsrrsnty.
1.
Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2.
Put
the
vehicle in PARK
(P)
for automatic transaxles
and NEUTRAL for manual transaxles.
3.
Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
(For manual transaxle vehicles, the shift lever
must be in REVERSE
(R)
before removing the key.)
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5.
Release the parking brake.
4-33
Loading
Your
Vehicle
(@I
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
TOTAL
LBS.
KG
MAX.
LOADING
&
GVWR
SAME
AS
VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE
SIZE
SPEED PRESSURE
RTG
PSliKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF
TIRES ARE
HOT,
ADD
4PS1;28KPa
SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
~ ~~~~
~-
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information
label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells
you the proper size, speed rating and recommended
inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also
gives you important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight
that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options.
MFDBYGENERALMOTORSCORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR
RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS
TO
ALL
APPLI-
CABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS
IN
EFFECT ON
THE
DATE
OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
The other label is the Certification label, found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
4-34
And,
if
you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’t carry more than
132
Ibs.
(60
kg)
in
your trunk.
Things you put inside your vehicle can ,ike
and injure people
in
a sudden stop or turn, or
in
a crash.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and
it
can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the iife of your vehicle.
e
e
e
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In
a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle
so
that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint
in
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure
it
whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
your
vehicie.
4-35
Towing
a
Trailer
If you don’t use the correct equ,pment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well
--
or even
at all.
You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only
if
you have followed all the steps in
this
section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer
if
it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers.
So
please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
4-36
If
You
Do Decide To
Pull
A
Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having
to
do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000
miles
(1
600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50
mph
(80
km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts
of
your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than
55
mph
(90
km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
ihree important considerations have to do with weight:
Then, during the first
500
miles
(800
km) that
L’W
the weight of the trailer,
-
the weight of the traiier tongue
0
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight
of
the Trailer
How
heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg). But
even that can be
too
heavy.
It
depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And,
it
can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-51 71
In Canada, write
to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LIH 8P7
4-37
Weight
of
the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry
in
it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And
if
you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Loading
Your
Vehicle
on page
4-34
for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue
(A)
should
weigh
10-1
5
percent
of
the total loaded trailer
weight
(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see
if
the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
4-38
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Tire
Loading Information label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see
Loading
Your
Vehicle on page
4-34.
Then
be sure you don’t go over the
GVW
limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Will
yo11
have
to
make
any
holes
in
the
body
nf
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust on
page
2-30.
Dirt ana water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer
so that the tongue will not drop to
the road
if
it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack
so
you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes
so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And because you may have anti-lock
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system.
If
you do, both systems won’t work well,
e!-
2!
2!!.
4-39
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If
the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing
Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if
possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice:
Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal.
Do
this
so
your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-40
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even
if
the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are stiil working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before
you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes
so
much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around
45
mph
(70
km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
P;
‘ting
on
Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill.
If
something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But
if
you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1.
Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into a
gear for a manual transaxle, yet. When parking
uphill, turn your wheels away from the curb. When
parking downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2.
Have someone place chocks under the trailer
1/:!?ee!s.
3.
When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transaxle or
REVERSE
(R)
for a manual
transaxle.
5.
Release the regular brakes.
4-4
1
When
You
Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1.
Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3.
Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See
Engine Overheating on
page
5-26.
4-42
Section
5
Service and Appearance Care
Service
...........................................................
-5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
.........................
5.4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle
.....................................................
-5-4
Fuel
...............................................................
-5-5
Gasoline Octane
...........................................
-5-5
Gasoline Specifications
....................................
5.5
California Fuel
..............................................
-5-6
Additives
......................................................
-5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries
..............................
-5-6
Filling Your Tank
.....................................
5-7
Fillins a Portable Fuel Container
..
...... 5.8
the Hood
...................................................... 5-9
Hood Release
..............................................
5-10
Engine Compartment Overview
.......................
5-12
Engine Oil
..................................................
-5-1
5
Au'romaiic Transaxie Fiuia
A-LL
Manual Transaxle Fluid
..................................
5-22
Checking Things Under
Engine Air CleanedFilter
................................
5-21
-
^^
.............................
Hydraulic Clutch
...........................................
5-22
Engine Overheating
.......................................
5-26
Cooling System
............................................
5-28
Power Steering Fluid
.....................................
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
............
............
-5-36
Brakes
......................................................
-5-38
Battery
........................................................
5-41
Jump Starting
..............................................
5-42
Engine Coolant
.............................................
5-23
Headlamp Aiming
...........................................
5-47
Bulb
Replacement
..........................................
5-49
Haloger;
!3L;lbs
..............................................
5-49
Headlamps
..................
....
.........
5-49
Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps
..........
.........
5-50
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
....................................
5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps
............
5-50
n-.-~
n
..II--
nepmwzIIIe111
DUIU~
J-J
1
rc4
.......................................
5-
1
Section
5
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
.............
5-52
Tires
..............................................................
5.53
Inflation
..
Tire Pressure
................................
5.54
Tire Inspection and Rotation
...........................
5.55
When It
Is
Time for New Tires
.......................
5-56
Buying New Tires
.........................................
5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
..........................
5-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
..................
5-58
Wheel Replacement
....................................
-559
Tire Chains
..................................................
5-60
If
a Tire Goes Flat
........................................
5-61
Compact Spare Tire
......................................
5-71
Appearance Care
............................................
5-72
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
.................
5-72
Care
of Safety Belts
..................................
5-75
Weatherstrips
....................
...........
5-75
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your Vehicle
..............
......
-575
Changing a Flat Tire
.....................................
5-62
Sheet Metal Damage
.....................................
5.77
Finish Damage
.............................................
5-77
Underbody Maintenance
................................
5-78
Chemical Paint Spotting
.................................
5-78
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
...........
5.78
Vehicle Identification
.....................................
5-80
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.................
5-80
Service Parts Identification Label
....................
5-80
Electrical System
............................................
5-81
Add-on Electrical Equipment
........................
-5-81
Windshield Wiper Fuses
................................
5-81
Power Windows and Other Power Options
.......
5-81
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
............................
5-81
Capacities and Specifications
....
..............
5.86
Capacities and Specifications
.........................
5.86
Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts .......... 5.88
5-2
Service
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one
of
these marks:
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If
you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page
7-
10.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-59.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See
Part
E:
Maintenance Record on page 6- 16.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about
it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.
If
you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break
or
fall
off.
You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside
of
your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is
an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of
87
or higher. If the octane is less than
87,
you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If
this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87
octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine.
A
little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary.
If
you are using
87
octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline
Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
5-5
California Fuel
If
your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications.
If
this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see
Malfunction
indicator
Lamp on
page
3-31
)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly
if
they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
Notices
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
5-6
Filling
Your
Tank
The tethered fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Fuel vapor is highly flammable.
It
burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap inside the
fuel door.
To
remove
the
ftjel
cap:
turn
it
slowly
to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if
you
let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
5-7
If you get fuel on yourself and then somett
--g
ignites
it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen
if
your tank is
nearly full, and
is
more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle on page
5-75.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine
if
the fuel cap has been left
off
or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See
Malfunction lndicator Lamp on
page
3-31.
Notice:
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the
right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you
get the wrong type,
it
may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See “Malfunction lndicator Lamp”
in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
m-=
Never
fill
a portable fuel container while
it
is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while
it
is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-8
Checking Things Under
the HnDd
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine
is
not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
I-
I
Thi
,s
thai
urn
can
-
t
on hot engir parts
and start a fire. These include
liquids
like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or
spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-9
Hood
Release
To
open the hood, do the following:
1.
Pull the handle located
under the instrument
panel on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
2.
Then go to the front
of
the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release.
5-1
0
3.
Lift the hood.
4.
Release the hood prop rod from its retainer and put
the hood prop into the slot in the hood marked
PROP ROD.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then let
the hood down and close it firmly.
5-1
1
Engine Compartment Overview
When
you
open the hood on the 2.2L L4
ECOTECTM
engine,
you'll
see the following:
5-1
2
A.
Engine Coolant Surge Tank
B. Engine Oil Dipstick
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap
D.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
E.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
G.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
H.
Battery
I.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
5-1
3
When you open the hood on the
3400
V6
engine,
you'll
see the following:
A.
Engine Coolant Surge Tank
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir
F.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
G.
Battery
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
5-1
4
Engine
Oil
LOW
OIL
I
If
the
LOW
OIL
light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
L
3400
V6
Engine Only
For more information, see
Low
Oil
Level
Light
on
page
3-35.
YOU should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking
Engine
Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine
oil
every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
2.2L L4
ECOTEC
Engine
5-1
5
Pull out the dipstick and clean
it
with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
3400
V6 Engine
The engine
oil
dipstick handle is yellow. The dipstick on
the
2.2L
L4
ECOTEC engine is located at the front of
the engine compartment. The dipstick on the
3400
V6
engine is located at the front of the engine, behind
the fan. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page
5-12
for more information on location.
Turn
off
the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan.
If
you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
I
3400
V6 Engine
5-1
6
When
to Add
Engine Oil
If
the oil is at or below the
MIN
mark for the
2.2L
L4
ECOTEC engine or below the cross-hatched area at the
tip
of the dipstick for the
3400
V6
engine, then you’ll
need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use
the right kind. This part explains what kind
of
oil
to
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities
and Specifications
on
page
5-86
Notice: Don’t add too much
oil.
If
your engine has
so
much oil that the
oil
level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
I
For the location of the
engine oil
fill
cap see
IA
SAE
5W-30
El
Be sure to
fill
it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
5-1
7
What
Kind
of
Engine
Oil
to
Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute
(API).
Do
not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If
you choose to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container.
If
you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle,
as
shown
in
the viscosity chart.
RECOMMENDED
SAE
VISCOSITY
GRADE
ENGINE
OILS
HOT
WEATHER
(0
1
RECOMMENDED
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE
SAE
1OW-40,
SAE
2OW-50
OR
ANY
OTHER
VlSCOSlN
GRADE
OIL
NOT RECOMMENDED
I
5-1
8
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SAE 5W-30.
If
you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE 1OW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol,
if
it’s going to be
0°F
(-18°C)
or above.
Do
not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Nofice:
Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM
Goodwrench@ oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If
you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29”C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
s;.nthctic
ci!
cr
2::
sfl,E
!-j\)!-zc
e!!.
Eeth
?.,I!!!
nrn\/idn
ra
-
-
I--
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t
add anything to
your
oil.
The recommended
oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM
Oil
Life SystemTM)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based
on
driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE
OIL
light will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if
you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
%Est
!x
rcsd.
It
is
a!sc
irr?pcrtz??t
?e
check
;‘QL!T
Qi!
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at
3,000
miles
(5
000
km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
:vheneve:
the
ci!
is
changed.
5-1
9
How
to Reset the Change
Oil
Light
The GM Oil Life SystemTM calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system
so
it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL light being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the oil life indicator, do the following steps:
1.
With the ignition key in
ON
(a short time after
turning
off
the engine), press the RESET button
located in the driver's side instrument panel
fuse block. See "Instrument Panel Fuse Block"
under
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page
5-81.
2.
When the CHANGE OIL light starts to flash, press
and hold the RESET button again.
The reset
is
complete when you hear the chimes and
the CHANGE
OIL
light goes out.
If
your vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L L4 ECOTEC
engine, it has a unique oil filter element. When
reinstalling the filter cap do not exceed
18
Ib ft
(25
N*m
).
Inspect the condition of the O-ring and replace
if
damaged.
See your dealer for additional information.
What
to
Do
with
Used
Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don't let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose
of
clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a
problem properly disposing of your used
oil,
ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.
Check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4.
Put the cover back on tightly.
2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine shown,
3400
V6
Engine similar
The engine air cleanedfilter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side
of
the vehicle.
See
Engine Compartment Overview on page
5-
i2
ior
more information on location.
To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1.
Remove the screws that hold the cover on.
2.
Lift
off
the cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page
6-4.
I--
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off
can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air,
it
stops
flame if the engine backfires.
If
it
isn’t
there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don’t drive with
it
off,
and be careful working
i
on the engine with the air cleanerlfilter
off.
Notice;
If the air cleanerlfilter is
off,
a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in
place when
you’re driving.
5-2
1
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
It
is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your
oil
changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every
50,000
miles
(83
000
km)
if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRQN@-Ill, because fluid with that label
is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused
by
fluid other than DEXRON@-Ill is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
It
is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss.
If
a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your oil
changed. See
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
on
page
6-15
for the proper fluid
to
use.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid
loss
in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-22
When
to
Check and What
to
Use
Schedule to determine
how often you should
check the fluid level in your
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper
fluid. See
Part B: Owner
Checks and Services
on
page 6-9
and
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
on
page 6- 15.
How
to Check and Add Fluid
You do not need to check the fluid level unless you
suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, take
the cap
off.
If
the fluid level reaches the top of the
reservoir, the fluid level is correct. It isn’t a good idea to
top
off
your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a
leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL@ engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240
000
km), whichever occurs first,
if
you add
only DEX-COOL@ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when
it
is low. If you have
a
problem
with engine overheating, see
Engine Overheating
on
page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@ coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to
-34°F
(-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F
(1
29°C).
@
Protect against rust and corrosion.
@
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-23
Notice:
When adding coolant,
it
is
important that
you use only
DEX-COOL@
(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000
miles
(50,000
km) or
24
months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@
is
not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
What
to
Use
Use a mixture of one-half
clean, drinkable wafer
and
one-half
DEX-COOL@
coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts.
If
you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.
With
plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get
the
overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50
mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL@ coolant.
Notice:
If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
Too
much water
in
the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If
you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-24
Checking
Coolant
2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine shown,
3400
V6
Engine similar
The coolant surge tank
is
located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See
Engine Compartment Overview
on
page
5-12
for more information
on
location.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap
-
even a little
-
when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on
a
level surface. When your
mgine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL
;OLD
mark, or a little higher.
If the
low
coolant light
comes on and stays on,
it
means you’re
low
on
engine coolant.
See
Low Coolant Warning Light
on
page
3-31
for more
nformation.
5-25
Adding
Coolant
If
you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture
at the surge tank,
but only when the
engine is cool.
If
the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See
Engine Overheating
on page
5-26
and “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank under
Cooling System on page
5-28
for instructions.
Engine
Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a
low
coolant warning light
on
your vehicle’s instrument panel.
See
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page
3-31
and
Low Coolant Warning Light on page
3-31.
If
Steam Is
Coming From
Your
Engine
1
--I
can be -Jrned you
s
I
coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
I
I
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-26
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from
it.
Just turn
it
off
and get
everyone away from the vehicle until
it
cools
down. Wait
until
there
is
no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in
it
can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine
if
it
overheats, and get out
of
the
vehicle
until
the engine
is
cool.
Notice:
If
your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
covered by your warranty.
!x!
bZd!.JI
dZ~ZcJ;ed.
The
ccst!.;
rep2iIrs
\VC~!d
nst
5e
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming
From
Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, can
indicate a serious problem. See
Low
Coolant Warning
Light
on
page
3-31.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If
you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or
so:
1.
In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
(N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do
so,
pull off the road,
engine idle.
speed and open the window as necessary.
shiff
!e
PPRK
(P)
9r ?!ENT!?P.L
(N)
2nd
!et
!!-!e
2.
Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
5-27
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive.
Just
to be safe, drive slower for about
10
minutes.
If
the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still
no
sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning,
turn
off
the engine
and
get everyone
out
of
the
vehicle
until it
cools
down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but
to
get service
help right away.
Cooling
System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
2.2L
L4
Engine
shown,
3400
V6
Engine similar
A.
Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B.
Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-28
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If
the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL
COLD
mark.
If
it isn’t,
you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
5-29
Heater
a
_.__
.
-ldiatoL -.oses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there
is
a leak. If you
run
the engine,
it
could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If
there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to
see
if
the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If
the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running.
If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
Notice:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
Notice:
When adding coolant,
it
is
important that
you use only
DEX-COOL@ (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL
is
added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
-
at
30,000
miles
(50
000
km) or
24
months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@ is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
How
to
Add
Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice:
This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see
if
coolant is visible in the surge tank.
If
coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the
FULL
COLD
mark, add a
50/50
mixture of
clean, drinkable
water
and
DEX-COOL@
coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is cool before
you
do it. See
Engine Coolant on page
5-23
for more
information.
5-30
If
no coolant is visible in
the
surge
tank, add coolant
as
follows:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap
--
even
a
little
--
they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap
to
cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-31
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.
With
plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50
mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX COOL@ coolant.
Notice:
In
cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and
it
will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-32
1.
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any pressure still left
to
be vented out the discharge hose.
t-nn
rntnrt-lnt-btnricn
/loft\
ghnt
It
hrrn
nr
t\Arn
Qnrl
"wL4,nb-,"#-U,\"",.J-
\'UtL,
UUVUL
LllV
VI
,""V
UIIU
..
-
,
",'
.....
.
.
.,
2.
Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly, and
remove
it.
5-33
3. Then
fill
the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the hash mark on the label. Wait
about five minutes, then check to see
if
the level is
below the hash mark.
If
the level is below the
hash mark, add additional coolant to bring the level
up to the hash mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the hash mark
for at least five minutes.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap
off,
start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-34
Power
Steering
Fluid
5.
Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer,
if
necessary.
A
L
L.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.
A
fluid
loss
in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page
5-72
for reservoir location.
5-35
How
to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
The level should be at the
FULL
COLD
mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid
to
bring the level up
to
the mark.
What
to
Use
To determine what kind of fluid
to
use, see
Part
Dr
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page
6-
15.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure
to
use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer
Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to
read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use
a
fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See
Engine
Compartment Overview on page
5-12
for reservoir
location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low
washer fluid telltale that
will come on in the
WASHER
FLU
ID
instrument panel cluster
when the washer fluid
is
low.
See
Low
Washer Fluid Warning Light on page
3-36
for
more information.
5-36
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
towards the front of
the vehicle.
Notice:
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause
the
solution
to freeze
and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system.
Also,
water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when
it’s
very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if
it
is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)
in
your
windshield washer.
It
can damage your
washer system and paint.
5-37
Brakes
Brake
Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side
of
the engine compartment. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine
Compartment Overview
on
page
5-
72.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid
is
leaking out of the brake system.
If
it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
So,
it isn’t a good idea to “top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak.
If
you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
If
you have too much brake fluid,
it
can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work
is
done on the brake
hydraulic system.
5-38
BRAKE
I
I
United States
I
I
Canada
When your brake fluid falls
to
a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See
Brake System Warning
Light on page
3-28.
What
to
Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3
brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page
6-
15.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This
will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
\.
._h the wrong kinc~ luid in you1 re
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all.
This
could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops
of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil,
in
your
brake system can damage brake system
parts
so
badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash
it
off
immediately. See
“Appearance Care’’ in the Index.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
--
le bra wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes won’t work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence
to
GM
torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See
Brake
System
Inspection on page
6-14.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer
if
the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or
if
there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake
Adjustment
Every time you make
a
moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear.
If you rarely make a moderate
or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust
correctly. If you drive in that way, then
-
very
carefully
-
make a few moderate brake stops about
every
1,000
miles
(1
600
km), so your brakes will adjust
properly.
5-40
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have
to
be of top quality and work well together
if
the vehicle is
to
have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system
-
for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in
-
be sure
you get new approved replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example,
if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change
-
for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come
to
expect can change in
replacement brake parts.
many
other
ways
if
someone
puts
in
the
wrong
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco@ battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelcoC”-‘
battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page
5-
12
for battery location.
Warning;
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals
known
to
the
State
of
California
to
cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If
you’re not going
to
drive your vehicle for
25
days or
more, remove the black, negative
(-)
cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries have acic bat can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt
if
you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips
on
working around a battery without
I
3--L
’
=
rrnttjqrr
hl
Irt.
Contact your dealer
to
learn how
to
prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see
Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page
3-64
or
I
nefi-Deterrent Feature
(RDS
RaQiosj on page
3-64.
-.
5-41
Jump
Starting
If
your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
I-
Ba..,ries can
hi.-
-
you.
’_
--?y cal. Je c-.lgerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
They contain enough electricity to
ignite.
burn you.
If
you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it
won’t work, and
it
could damage your vehicle.
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice:
If the other system
isn’t
a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other.
If
they are, it could cause
a
ground
connection you don’t want.
You
wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice:
If
you leave your radio on,
it
could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3.
Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn
off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminal locations on
each vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page
5-12
for more information on location.
5-42
An electric fan can start
up
even wt.-.r the
engine
is
not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
m
rn
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more
light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You
don’t need to add water tsthe ACDelco@
battery installed
in
your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid
is
there.
If
it
is
low, add water
to
take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn
you.
Don’t get
it
on
you. If you accidentally get
it
in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
I
Fans or other moving el,,,ne parts can
...,
ure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine
is
running.
5.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation.
If
they do, you could get a
SI
Iucln.
I
I
IC
VCIIICIIG~
UWUIU
UG
UCAIIIUY~U
CUW.
-L--I-
TI--
..-L.:-1-,.
mA,,lA
Lm
An-mmr.P4
tnn
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive
(+)
will go to
positive
(+)
or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if
the vehicle has one. Negative
(-)
will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative
(-)
terminal
if
the vehicle with the dead
battery has one.
5-43
Don’t connect positive
(+)
to negative
(-)
or you’ll
7.
Don’t let the other end
get a short that would damage the battery and
touch metal. Connect it to
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect
the positive
(+)
terminal
the negative
(-)
cable to the negative
(-)
terminal
of the good battery. Use
a
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
remote positive
(+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
6. Connect the red positive
(+)
cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery.
Use
a remote
positive
(+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-44
8.
Now connect the black
negative
(-)
cable to the
negative
(-)
terminal
of the good battery. Use
a remote negative
(-)
terminal
if
the vehicle
has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end
of
the negative
(-)
cable
doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative
(-)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9.
Connect the other end of the negative
(-)
cable at
least
18
inches
(45
cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10.
NnW
nt8t-t
the
vehicle
with
the
coed
battery
and
run
the engine for a while.
5-45
11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice:
Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting
if
jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
I
Jumper Cable Removal
A.
Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
6.
Good Battery
C.
Dead Battery
To
disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1.
Disconnect the black negative
(-)
cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2.
Disconnect the black negative
(-)
cable from the
3.
Disconnect the red positive
(+)
cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
vehicle with the good battery.
1..
Disconnect the red positive
(+)
cable from the other
vehicle.
5-46
Headlamp
Aiming
Your vehicle has a headlamp system equipped with
horizontal and vertical aim indicators. The aim has been
pre-set at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even fnough your vertieai
and
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the
“0
(zero) marks on their scales.
If
your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment may be necessary
if it is difficult to see lane markers (for horizontal
you (for vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps
need to be re-aimed,
we
recommend that you take it to
your dealer for service; however, it is possible for
you to re-aim your headlamps as described in the
following procedure.
~im),
nr
if
~n~nmins
drivers
flash
their
hi9h
beams at
Notice:
To
make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface.
If necessary, pads may be used on an uneven
surface.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
The vehicle should be fully assembled and aii other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
There should not be any cargo or loading of
the vehicle, except it should have a full tank of
fuel and one person or
160
Ibs.
(75
kg) on
the driver’s seat.
Close all doors.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
5-47
I
Start with the horizontal
aim. The adjustment
screws can be turned with
an
E8
Tom
@
socket.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Horizontal Aiming
Vertical Aiming
1.
Turn the horizontal aiming screw until the indicator
is
lined up with zero.
2.
Turn the vertical aiming screw until the level bubble
is
lined up with zero.
5-48
Bulb
Replacement
For the type
of
bulb to use, see
Replacement
Bulbs
on
page
5-51.
For any bulb changing procedure not
listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen
Bulbs
1
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others couiu be injured. Be sure
to
read
and
follow
the instructions on the bulb
package.
I
Headlamps
1.
Lift up on the two retaining clips which secure the
headlamp assembly.
2.
Lift the headlamp assembly forward, out of the
3.
Remove the rubber cap covering the bulb assembly.
4.
Turn the bulb assembly retainer counterclockwise
one-sixth
of a turn and pull out the bulb assembly.
5.
Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
6. Replace the bulb.
7.
Reverse Steps
1
through
5
to reinstall the bulb
mounting bracket.
assembly and headlamp housing.
5-49
Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps
1.
Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to the
removal procedure earlier in this section.
2.
Turn the bulb assembly retainer and pull out
the bulb.
3.
Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
4.
When replacing the bulb, be sure to properly
align the bulb with the locating feature in the
assembly.
5.
Reverse Steps
1
through
3
to reinstall the bulb
assembly.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
1.
Open the trunk lid and locate the center
high-mounted stop lamp on the inside
of
the lid.
2.
Use a tool to remove the three screws.
3.
Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
4.
Reverse this procedure to reassemble the lamp.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
I
/---
A.
Taillamp
6.
TaiVBrake Lamp
C.
Taillamp
D.
Turn Signal
E.
Back-up Lamp
5-50
1. Disconnect the cargo net in the trunk.
2.
Pull back the trunk trim.
3.
Remove the three wing nut bolts which fasten the
taillamp lens to the vehicle.
4.
Carefully remove the taillamp lens from the body
and avoid scratching the paint or dropping it.
5.
Turn the bulb socket 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise
and pull out the bulb assembly.
6. To remove a bulb, gently pull the bulb out from the
socket. Put in a new bulb.
7.
Reverse Steps
3
through
5
to reassemble the
taillamp.
Replacement
Bulbs
5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check in
At Least Twice a Year
on
page
6-10
for more
information.
Replacement blades come
in
different types and are
removed
in
different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1.
Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2.
Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3.
Install a new blade by reversing Steps
1
and
2.
For the proper type and size, see
Capacities and
Specifications
on
page
5-86.
5-52
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer.
If
you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Oldsmobile Warranty booklet for details.
r--
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of
too
much
friction.
You
could
have
an
air-out and
a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4
inflated tires pose
-..?
same
c
~ lger
I
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
I
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
~
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
~ Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
~ impact
-
such as when you
hit
a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
~ Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
I
I
your
tread
is
badiy
WBTii,
or
if
your
tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-53
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which
is
on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold’’ means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right.
It’s
not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
When
to
Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire.
It
should be at
60 psi
(420 kPa).
How
to
Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell
if
your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
0
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-54
Tire Inspection
and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
7,500
miles
(12
500
km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time
for New Tires on page
5-56
and
Wheel Replacement
on page
5-59
for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown
on
the Tire-Loading
Information label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and
Specifications on page
5-86.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or
or
parts to
which
it
is
fastened, can make wheel
nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come
off
and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust
or
dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do
this;
but be sure
to
use a
3cllCapcI
VI
VVll
c;
ut
U3If
IBLGI,
II
ywu
IIG‘CSU
LW,
LW
get
all
the rust or dirt
off.
See “Changing
a
Flat
Tire”
in
the Index.
--_
.------ -_.
...
:--
L”..-L
I-*-”
:+
.--.
~
“...-A
4-
4-
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-55
When
It
Is
Time
for
New
Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire
if
any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New
Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle.
If
your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS”
(for
mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
5-56
Uniform
Tire
Quality Grading
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires
of
different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
It's
all right to drive with your
compact spare, though.
It
was developed for
use on your vehicle.
I
If
you
use
bias-ply tires on your vehicle. the
I
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving.
A
tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear
200
Traction
AA
Temperature
A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to
30
cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available
on
General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
,t=yuj,.e!i-l-,-i-lis
&;-,d
dddiiisi-,a;
&-,erd;
;";otsrs
TiTG
5-57
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150
would wear one and
a half
(1.5)
times as well on the government course as
a tire graded
100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due
to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-
AA,
A,
B,
C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA,
A,
B,
and
C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A
tire marked
C
may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned
to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
-
A,
B,
C
The temperature grades are
A
(the highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability
to
dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to
sudden tire failure. The grade
C
corresponds to a level
of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent higher levels
of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel
Alignment and
Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory
to
give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However,
if
you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way
or
the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
5-58
Wheel
Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If
the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer
if
any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If
you need
to
replace any of your wheels? wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel
nuts
on your vehicle can be
dangerous.
It
could affect the braking and
handling
of
your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
Notice:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See
Changing
a
Flat
Tire on page
5-62
for more
mtormatlon.
5-59
Used
Replacement
Wheels
-
wmmu
I
Tire
Chains
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how
it’s
been used
or how far
it’s
been driven.
It
could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new
GM
original
equipment wheel.
I
If your ve :le
s
FLL
;OR16
re tires, ,,n’t
use tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may
be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only
if
its
manufacturer recommends
it
for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will
fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-60
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/50R16 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE
Class
“S”
type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them
as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.
If
you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them.
If
the contact continues, slow down
until
it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If
a
Tire
Goes
Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially
if
you maintain your tires properly.
If
air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But
if
you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If
a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A
rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
ir;
a
skid.
In
any
rear blowoi:,
rem0t.e
yoi;
foot
from
the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop
-
well off the road if possible.
If
a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
iackinq equipment to chanqe a flat tire safely.
5-61
Changing a Flat
Tire
If
a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip
off
the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1.
Set the parking brake firmly.
2.
Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST
(1)
or REVERSE (R).
3.
Turn
off
the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won't
move, you can put blocks at the front and
rear
of
the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side
of
the vehicle, at the
opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-62
18
inches
(46
cm)
18
inches
(46
cm)
4. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
5.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous.
If
the vehicle slips
off
the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
5-65
.
Asing your vehic-
..____
__._
jal--- impropc
-r
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure
to
fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6.
Raise the vehicle
by
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the
ground
so
there
is
enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
7.
Remove all of the wheel nuts.
8.
Remove the flat tire.
5-66
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
R---t
OL
Art on the wheel, or on the parts to
which
it
is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come
off
and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
ine
piaces
wnere
ine
wneei
aiiaches
io
ihe
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do
this;
but
be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt
off.
Never use
c
or grease on studs or
nl
If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall
off,
causing a serious accident.
10.
Install the compact spare tire.
11.
Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-67
12.
Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
13.
Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly
in
a
crisscross
sequence,
as
shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come
off.
This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See ”Capacities
and Specifications’’ in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To
avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications”
in
the index for
the
wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact
spare. If you try
to
put a wheel cover on your
compact spare, you could damage the cover or the
spare.
5-68
Storing the Flat Tire and
Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in
1
passenger compartment
of
the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment.
Place
the tire
in
the
compartment,
ther!
secure the
adapter and wing nut. Place the cover and the nut on
top of the flat tire. Store the jack and the wrench in the
foam tray.
A
L
F
G
A. Nut
B. Cover
C.
Wing
Bolt
D.
Adapter
E. Wrench
F.
Jack
G.
Tool Tray
H. Flat Tire
5-69
Storing the Spare
Tire
and
Tools
StG..ng a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment
of
the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use
only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as
you
can. See
Compact Spare Tire
on
page
5-71.
Store the compact spare tire and tools as
shown in the diagram.
A. Nut
B. Cover
C. Wing Bolt
D.
Adapter
E.
Wrench
F.
Jack
G.
Tool Tray
H.
Compact Spare Tire
5-70
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It
should be
60
psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should
stop
as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made
to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(1
05
km/h) for distances up to
3,000
miles
(5
000
km),
so
you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will
last
longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
Nofice:
When the compact spare
is
installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts
of
your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-7
1
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames
if
you strike a
match or get them on a hot part
of
the vehicle. Some are
dangerous
if
you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never
use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
They can all be hazardous
-
some more than
others
-
and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual
says
you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside
of
Your
Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid
of
dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Nail Polish Remover
5-72
FabricKarpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM
-
approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
on
page
5-78.
Here are some cleaning tips:
a
a
-.
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can
-
before
they set.
Carefully scrape
off
any excess stain.
Use
a
dean
cioth
or
sponge,
and
change
io
a
cieari
area often.
A
soft
brush may be used
if
stains are
stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1.
Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5.
As
soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
7.
Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
sponge
to
remove any excess cleaner.
towel or cloth.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
2.
If
a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
soiled area with cool water.
described earlier.
3.
If
an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a watedbaking soda solution:
1
teaspoon
(5
ml) of baking soda to
1
cup
(250
ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape
off
excess stain.
2.
Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3.
If
a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-73
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if
you don’t get them
off
quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Leather
Use a
soft
cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally.
Do
not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never
use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed
to
work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water
to
clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often.
GM
Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page
5-78.
Notice:
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped
off
later.
If
abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside
of
the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
5-74
Care of Safety Belts
Keep
P+s
clean and dry.
Do
noi ,,,,ch or dye safety belts.
If
you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
Fluids and Lubricants on page
6-15.
s.4~y,,”u..“.
Qnnli,-Q+inn
I I
ml\r
I
,-J
UY
ha
rqgIrpc!-
spp
Psfl
!-J:
.Rqc_nmrnended
Cleaning the Outside of
Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing
Your
Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold
water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of
the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely.
You
can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
on
page
5-78.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-75
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
on
page
5-78.
Your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat paint
finish.
Notice:
Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish
if
they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle
as soon as
possible.
If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If
the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or
if
the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-76
Aluminum
Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A
wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes
cm
also damage the surface
of
these
whee!s.
Tires
To
clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe
off
any overspray
or
splash from all
pairlreu
sur
la~es
VI
I
ule
LJUUY
VI
V~lltGla
btI=
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
.
.
.I
--- *I--
I--J.-
_”
...L--l-
+Lm
Sheet Metal Damage
If
your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in
the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense;
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-77
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At
least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect.
Dirt
packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12
months or
12,000
miles
(20
000
km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your
GM
dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM
Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
polishing cloth.
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
~ ~ ~ ~~~
Removes tar, road oil and
Chrome Cleaner and
Use on chrome or
Polish
stainless steel.
I
White Sidewall Tire
Removes soil and black
Cleaner
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
1
Glass Cleaner
I
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome
and
Wire
Wheel
from chrome wheels and
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
wire wheel covers.
5-78
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
kont’d)
Description
Usage
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe
off.
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light
surface
contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
I
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
~i~cjmr~rJ~hle
and
Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
I
phosphate free.
Description
Usage
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carDet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See
Part
D:
Recommended fluids and
Lubricants
on
page
6-
15.
5-79
Vehicle
Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
I
Service Parts Identification
Label
You’ll find this label on the bottom of your spare
tire cover. It’s very helpful
if
you ever need to order
parts. On this label
is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It
appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver‘s side. You can see it
if
you
look
through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
5-80
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice:
Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
on
page
1-59.
Windshield Wiper
Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
snow,
eic.,
iile
wiper
wiii
siup
ui-liii
ti-le
i-hstci-
GS~S.
If
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
A
circuit breaker in the fuse panel protects the power
windows. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination
of
fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: two
instrument panel fuse blocks and the engine
compartment fuse block.
There are four spare fuses located in the driver’s side
instrument panel end cap for your use.
Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks
There are two fuse panels for your vehicle. One is
located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel and
the other is located on the passenger’s side.
5-81
Instrument Panel
Fuse
Block
(Driver's Side)
f
I
A)
WIPER
I
F) EFC
BATT
G)
PCMACC
I
ti:
DALOCK
I
PWR
SEAT
E)
0
I)
IPC
/
BFC ACG
F)
.
DRIVER
Fuses
WIPER
TRUNK
REURADIO
AMP
TURN LPS
Usage
Windshield Wiper Motor,
Washer Pump
Trunk Release Relay/Motor, Audio
Amplifier/RFA
Turn Signal Lamps
Fuses
PWR
MIRROR
AIR BAG
BFC BATT
PCM ACC
DR
LOCK
IPC/BFC ACC
STOP
LPS
HAZARD LPS
I
PC/HVAC
BATT
Circuit
Breakers
PWR SEAT
Usage
Power Mirrors
Air Bags
Body Computer (BFC)
Power Control Module (PCM)
Door Lock Motors
Cluster, Body Computer (BFC)
Stop Lamps
Hazard Lamps
HVAC Head, Cluster, Data Link
Connector
Usage
Power Seats
Relay Usage
TRUNK
REL
Trunk Relay
DR UNLOCK Door Unlock Relay
DR LOCK Door Lock Relay
DRIVER DR Driver's Door Unlock Relay
UNLOCK
5-82
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
(Passenger’s Side)
SEE OTHER END
CAF
FOR FUSE PULLER
&SPARE
FUSES
A)
INST
LPS
C) CRUISE
SW
B)
CRUISE SW LPS
0)
HVAC
BLOWER
E)
CRUISE
F)
FOG LPS
G)
INT LPS
H)
RADIO
BATr
I)
SUNROOF
*
SEE
OWNERS
MANUAL
/
1’
Fuse
INST
LPS
CRUISE SW
LPS
CRUISE SW
Usage
Interior Lamp Dimming
Steering Wheel Cruise Control
Switch Lamps
Steering Wheel Cruise Control
Switches
HVAC Blower Motor
HVAC
BLOWER
CRUISE Cruise Control
FOG LPS
Fog Lamps
INT LPS Interior Courtesy Lamps
RADIO
BAT Radio, XMTM Satellite Radio/DAB
SUNROOF Power Sunroof
Circuit Breaker
Usage
PWR WNDW
Power Windows
Relay
FOG
LFS
Usage
Fog
iarnps
5-83
Engine
Compartment
Fuse
Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the
battery.
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Relays
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Usage
Ignition Switch
Right Electrical Center-Fog Lamps,
Radio, Body Function Control
Module, Interior Lamps
Left Electrical Center-Stop Lamps,
Hazard Lamps, Body Function
Control Module, Cluster, Climate
Control System
Anti-Lock Brakes
Left Electrical Center-Power Seats,
Power Mirrors, Door Locks, Trunk
Release, Audio Amplifier, Remote
Keyless Entry
Not Used
Ignition Switch
Cooling Fan
#I
Usage
Rear Defog
Not Used
Starter
Cooling Fan
#1
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Cooling Fan
#2
Cooling Fan
5-84
Relays
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Fuses
23-32
33
34
35
36
37
36
39
40
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Automatic Headlamp System
Automatic Headlamp System
Horn
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Usage
Spare Fuse Holder
Rear Defog
ACC~SSGP~
Power
Outlets, Cigarette
Lighter
Generator
Not Used
Air
Conditioning Compressor, Body
Function Control Module
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
A
..I
-._--
+:-
T
--.---.,
I,
r\ULUI
I
Idllb
I
I
C€l13C€AlG
Fuses
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Usage
Ignition System
Back-up Lamps, Brake Transaxle
Shift Interlock
Horn
PCM
Parking Lamps
Climate Control System, Air
Conditioning
Canister Vent Valve, Exhaust
Oxygen Sensors
Fuel Pump, Injectors
Not Used
Right Headlamp
Left Headlamp
Cooling Fan
#2
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Crank
Cooling Fan
#2
Ground
Fuse Puller for Mini Fuses
Not Used
5-85
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Automatic Transaxle
Complete Overhaul
Cooling System
2.2L L4
t
Engine
3400 V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.2L L4
t
Engine
3400 V6 Engine
8.6 quarts
13.6 quarts
8.2 L
12.9 L
5.0
quarts
4.5 quarts
4.8 L
4.3 L
5-86
Capacities
(cont’d)
Manual Transaxle
Complete Overhaul
1.8 quarts
1.7
L
I
Wheel Nut Torque
*ACDelco@ part number.
1 00 Ib-ft
tECOTECTM
I
140
Nom
See
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page
6-15.
Engine
Specidicatians
I
3400
V6
E
Automatic
0.060
inch
Manual
(1.52
mm)
1-2-3-4-5-6
5-87
Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts
Part
I
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2 L L4t Engine
3400 V6
Number
AI
172C*
AI
279C"
Engine Oil Filter
2.2
L
L4t Engine
3400 V6
PCV Valve
Spark Plugs
2.2
L
L4
t
Engine
3400
V6
PF2244G*
PF47*
CV892C*
41-981
*
(Platinum Plug)
41-1
01
*
(Platinum Plug)
Windshield Wiper Blades
TY
Pe
Passenger's Side
Driver's Side
*ACDelco@
part
number.
tECOTECTM
Shepherd's
Hook
17.0
inches (43.0 cm)
22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
5-88
Section
6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
......................................
6.2
Introduction
...................................................
6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
....................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements
..............................
6-2
How This Section
is Organized
.........................
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
...........
6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
....................
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
...................................
6-5
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
.................
6-9
At
Each Fuel Fill
............................................
6-9
At
Least Once a Month
...................................
6-9
At
Least Twice a Year
...................................
6-10
At Least Once a Year
...................................
6.10
Part C: Periodic Maintenance inspections
.........
6.13
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal inspection
............................
6.13
Exhaust System Inspection
............................
6.13
Fuel System Inspection
..................................
6.14
Engine Cooling System Inspection
...................
6.14
Throttle System Inspection
.............................
6.14
Brake System inspection
................................
6.14
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
....
6-15
Part E: Maintenance Record
...........................
6.16
6-
1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
14
r
Have you purchased the
GM
Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Your
Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality
of
the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle.
To
help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
6-2
How
This Section
is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle
in
good
“Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
services can be complex,
so
unless you are technically important inspections that your dealer’s service
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you department or another qualified service center should
should let your dealer’s service department or another perform.
qualified service center do these jobs.
condition.
“Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
I
the work yourself or have it done.
I
Per- _-‘ming mainten_---ce work on a vehicle can
be dangerous.
In
trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only
if
you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
If
you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician
do
the work.
“Part
E:
Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
If
you want to get the service information, see
Service
Publications Ordering information
on
page
7-
10.
6-3
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil scheduled maintenance
which explains the engine oil life system and how
it indicates when to change the engine
oil
and filter.
Also,
listed are scheduled maintenance services which
are
to
be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using
Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we don’t know exactly how
you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times
a
week. Or you may drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to
do
errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements.
So
please read the
following and note how you drive.
If
you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part
D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these.
All
parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See
Loading
Your
Vehicle
on
page
4-34.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See
Gasoline Octane
on
page
5-5.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(1
66
000
km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(1
66
000
km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240
000
km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles
(240
000
km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See
Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page
6-9
and
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page
6-
13.
Footnotes
t
The
U.S.
EfMrmmef%al Prdectim
Agency
or
the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
,iia;ii;eiiaiic.e
be
,.ec.ui.u'eu'.
+
A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page
6-14.
Engine
Oil
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine
oil
and filter as indicated by the
GM
Oil Life SystemTM (or every
12
months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This
is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that
oil life has been
diminished, it
wi!!
indicate that an
oil
change
is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL light will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if
you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be
must be reset. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
chs-mgd
!ezst
s-ve
2
ye2r
2nd
2t
this
?im,e
the
cwctam
'J
-*-*
'
*
6-5
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at
3,000
miles
(5
000
km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil
is
changed. See
Engine Oil on
page
5-15
for information on resetting the system.
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in part
E of this schedule.
An Emission Control Service.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
15,000 Miles (25
000
km)
0
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
t.)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
30,000 Miles
(50
000
km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
il
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission
Control Service.
37,500 Miles
(62
500
km)
El
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
45,000 Miles (75
000
km)
0
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
t.)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
6-6
50,000
Miles (83
000
km)
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if
the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C)
or
higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
52,500 Miles (87
500
km)
c3
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
60,000
Miles
(100
000
km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
0
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission
Control Service.
67,500
Miles (1 12
500
km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
75,000 Miles (125
000
km)
LI
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
f.)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
U
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
6-7
90,000
Miles
(150
000
km)
0
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
Control Service.
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
97,500
Miles
(162
500
km)
0
Rotate tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-55
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.
(See footnote
+.)
100,000
Miles
(166
000
km)
0
Inspect spark plug wires (except
2.2L
Code
F
L4
engine).
An Emission Control Service.
0
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if
the
vehicle
is
mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C) or
higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use
your
vehicle under any
of
these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
150,000
Miles
(240
000
km)
0
Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60
months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See
Engine Coolant on page
5-23
for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
0
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission
Control Service.
6-8
Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part
D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for
you
or a service station attendant to
perform these Lmderhood checks at each fuel fil!.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if
necessary. See
Engine Oil on page
5-15
for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture
if
necessary. See
Engine Coolant
on page
5-23
for further details.
Windshield
Washer
Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid
if
necessary.
See
Windshield Washer Fluid
on
page
5-36
for further
details.
At
Least Once
a
Month
Tire
Inreation
Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See
Tires
on
page
5-53
for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Ziean casseiire deck. Zieaning snouid be done every
50
hours of tape play. See
Audio System(s) on
page
3-38
for further details.
6-9
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also
look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield.
Also
see
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your Vehicle on page 5-75.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-15.
Manual Transaxle Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
Check for leaks.
A
fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired
if
needed.
Automatic Transaxle Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
Hydraulic Clutch
on
page 5-22.
A
fluid
loss
in this
system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part
D.
6-1
0
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all the door hinges and latches, including
those for the hood and the trunk lid. Part
D
tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter S---:tc"
Ct---'-
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
When you are doing this chec the vehicle
could move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others
CGG!~
be
i~j~d. FO~~GVV
the
steps
below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
2.
Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
around the vehicle.
brake. See
Parking Brake
on
page
2-26
if
necessary.
Do
not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn
off the engine immediately
if
it starts.
3.
Try
to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If
the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked
on
a level
surface.
2.
Firmly apply the parking brake. See
Parking Brake
on page
2-26
if
necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if
the vehicle begins to move.
but don't start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
3.
With the engine
off,
turn the key to the ON position,
6-1
1
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to
OFF
in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
OFF
only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to
OFF
only when the shift lever is in reverse.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only
in
OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Parl- 'P) ""xhanism Check
Park
on
a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal.
Do
this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To
check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready
to
apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
I
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-1
2
Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall).
You
should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See
Service Publications
Ordering Information on page
7-
IO.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals
if
necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near
the
exhmst system. Look for broken,
damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust
on page
2-30.
6-1
3
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if
they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To
help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear.
Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Brake
System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often
if
your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-1
4
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Wlndshleld
ti^
Optlkleen Washer solvent or
Washer Solvent
equivalent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No.
Hydraulic
brake fluid).
U.S.
12345347 in Canada
Clutch System
10953517, or equivalent DOT-3
Usaae
I
Fluid/Lubricant
-
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No.
US.
1052884, in Canada
Power
System
993294. or eauivalent).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Canada 10953474. or equivalent).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part
No.
U.S.
12346293, in Canada
992723, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements
of NLGl
#2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood
and
Door
Hinges
(GM Part
No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No.
U.S.
12345579, in Canada
1974984, or equivalent).
6-1
5
Part
E:
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and any
additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record pages. Also,
you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
6-1
6
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-1
7
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-1
8
Section
7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information
..................
7.2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
......................
7.2
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
Customer Assistance
Off
ices
............................
7.3
GM
Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities
..................................................
7.5
Roadside Assistance Program
..........................
7.5
(TTY)
Users
...............................................
7.3
Courtesy Transportation
..................................
-7-7
Government
...............................................
7.9
Government
...............................................
7.9
General Motors
...........................................
7.9
Service Publications Ordering Information
.........
7.10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Reporting Safety Defects to
7-
1
Customer
Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Oldsmobile. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP
ONE:
Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level.
If
the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO:
If
after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-442-6537. In Canada, contact GM of
Canada Customer Communication Centre in
Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Oldsmobile, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first
if
you have a concern.
STEP
THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if
you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program
is
an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days.
If
you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council
of
Better
Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1 804
Telephone: 1-800-955-51
00
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
oi
Coiumbia. Eiigibiiity is iimitea by
venicie
age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Oldsmobile has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user
can communicate with Oldsmobile by dialing:
1-800-833-OLDS (6537). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance
Off
ices
Oldsmobile encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance.
If
a
U.S.
customer wishes
to write to Oldsmobile, the letter should be addressed to
Oldsmobile’s Customer Assistance Center.
7-3
United States
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-51 71
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1
-800-442-OLDS (6537)
1-800-442-6537
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
1
-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors
of
Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
163-005
All
Overseas Locations
Please contact the
local
General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean IslandsKountries (Except
Puerto Rico and
U.S.
Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico,
S.
de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma
#
2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910
Mexico, D.F.
Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29
0
800
01 -800-508-0000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
GM
Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000
toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY)
users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
,-.-I1
+hn
ehll
htl,h;lit,,
Ac-c-irtqnpn
f‘nntnr
31
ball
11
IG
UIVI
IVIWUIIIL~
IW~IULUIIVV
VVI
I.V.
Roadside Assistance Program
Security
While
You Travel
1
-800-442-OLDS (6537)
As the proud owner
of
a new Oldsmobile vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.
Oldsmobile’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance
Representatives who are available 24 hours a day,
365 days
a
year.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call
1
-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All
TTY
GS~S
call
1-800-253-3830.
7-5
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service
or in the event of a vehicle-disabling accident
Flat tire change
Jump starts
Minor repairs to disabled vehicles
Assistance when vehicle is mired in sand, mud
or snow
Trip routing
Trip interruption expense benefits
Dealership locator service
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance specifically excludes
coverage for mounting, dismounting or changing
of
snow
tires, chains or other traction devices.
In
some cases, where service is impractical, the driver
may be authorized to obtain other service for which
reimbursement is provided.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Oldsmobile’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when,
in
Oldsmobile’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone
call away. Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance:
1
-800-442-OLDS
(6537),
text telephone
(TTY)
users, call
1-888-889-2438.
7-6
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Oldsmobile has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles.
To
enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If
your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related.
If
it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do
so
as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation
Warranty service can
wait. However, if you
Options
generally be completed while you
are unable to wait Oldsmobile
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
.-
y"ur
dealer
tiai-,
Gffer
YGU
21Ee
of
+L,
r-ll-...
:...-.
LI
It:
lUllWVVll
ly.
Shuttle
Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way shuttle ride to a destination up to
10
miles
from the dealership.
7-7
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If
your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to
$30
per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10
per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle
or
reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of
$30.00
per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc.
You
are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is
not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A
separate booklet entitled
Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian
Vehicles:
For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-8
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If
NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and
if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA,
U.S.
Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C.
20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C Ottawa Ontario KIA ON5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-442-6537, or write:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O.
Box
33171
Detroit,
Mi
48232-51 71
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (Englishj
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 8P7
7-9
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1
-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
in-Portfolio: Includes
a
Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00
7-1
0
Current and
Past
Model Order
Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles.
To
request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-41
23
Monday-Friday 8:OO
AM
-
6:OO
PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.
0.
Box
07130
Detroit, MI
48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers:
All
listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable
in
U.S. funds.
7-1
1
A
Accessory Power Outlets
..............................
3-17
Adding Washer Fluid
.......................................
5-36
Additional Program Information
...........................
7-8
Additives, Fuel
.................................................
5-6
Adjusting the Speakers
Air Bag
Air Bag System, Supplemental Restraint
Add-On Electrical Equipment
............................
5-81
(Balance/Fade)
............................
3-40, 3-46, 3-56
Readiness Light
..........................................
3-26
System (SRS)
.............................................
1-53
Air CleanedFiIter, Engine
.................................
5-21
All
Overseas Locations
......................................
7-4
Aluminum Wheels
...........................................
5-77
AM
................................................
.......
3-65
Antenna, XMTM Satellite Radio System
................
3-67
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
............................
4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light
..............
3-29
Care of Safety Belts
....................................
5-75
Chemical Paint Spotting
...............................
5-78
Antenna, Backglass
.........................................
3-66
Appearance Care
............................................
5-72
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
................
5-72
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
..............
5-75
Finish Damage
............................................
5-77
G!.!
Vehicle
CarelAppearmce
Materials
..........
5-78
Sheet Metal Damage
...................................
5-77
Underbody Maintenance
...............................
5-78
Appearance Care (cont.)
Weatherstrips
...........
........................
5-75
Ashtrays
........................................................
3-18
Audio System(s)
.........................................
3-38
Backglass Antenna
......................................
3-66
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
................
3-65
Care of Your CD Player
...............................
3-66
Care of Your CDs
........................................
3-66
Chime Level Adjustment
...............................
3-67
DAB Radio Antenna System
..........................
3-67
Radio with Cassette and CD
.........................
3-52
Radio with CD
....................................
3-39, 3-42
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS)
................................
3-38
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS)
................................
3-38
Theft-Deterrent Feature
................................
3-64
Understanding Radio Reception
.....................
3-65
KhATM
%?P!!ifP
Radln
Antenna
.
Sysf9t-p
..............
1-87
Automatic Headlamp System
............................
3-14
Automatic Transaxle
........................................
2-18
Fluid
..........................................................
5-22
Operation
...................................................
2-22
Automatic Transaxle Check
..............................
6-10
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
.............................................
6-11
Audio Systems
Backglass Antenna
..........................................
3-66
Backing Up
....................................................
4-40
Battery
..........................................................
5-41
Battery Replacement
.........................................
2-6
Battery Run-Down Protection
............................
3-1 7
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
.........................
4-22
Body Lubrication Service
..................................
6-1
1
Brake
Parking
...................................
....
2-26
System Inspection
....................
....
6-14
System Warning Light
...................
....
3-28
Brake Adjustment
............................................
5-40
Brake Fluid
....................................................
5-38
Brake Pedal Travel
.........................................
5-40
Brake Wear
...................................................
5-40
Brakes
................................
...................
5-38
Braking
...................................
.................
4-6
Break-in, New Vehicle
.....................................
2-17
Bulb Replacement
...........................................
5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
........
5-50
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
.............
5-50
Headlamp Aiming
..
..........................
5-47
Braking in Emergencies
.............
.............
4-8
Halogen Bulbs
............................................
5-49
Headlamps
........
..........................
5-49
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Replacement Bulbs
......................................
5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal. and Stoplamps
............
5-50
Buying New Tires
...........................................
5-56
C
............
California Fuel
........................
......
5-6
Canada
.........................................
..
7-4
Canadian Owners
...............................
Canadian Roadside Assistance
...........................
7-7
Capacities and Specifications
............................
5-86
Carbon Monoxide
...................
4.25. 4.36. 4-1
1.
4-30
Care
of
Safety Belts
........
................
5-75
Care of Your
.....
II
Cassette Tape Player ...
................
3-65
CD Player
..................................................
3-66
Cassette Deck Service
......................................
6-9
Center Console Storage Area
...........................
2-34
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
...........
5-50
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts
.....
1-50
Chains, Tires
..................................................
5-60
Charging System Light
....................................
3-27
Check
Engine Light
...............................................
3-31
Checking Coolant
............................................
5-25
CDS
..........................................................
3-66
Cassette Tape Messages
.................................
3-62
3
Checking Engine Oil
........................................
5-15
Checking Things Under the Hood
.......................
5-9
Checking Your Restraint Systems
......................
1-60
Chemical Paint Spotting
...................................
5-78
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems
...............................
1-38
Infants and Young Children
...........................
1-34
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
..........................
1-43
Older Children
.............................................
1-32
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
........................................
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position
...........................................
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat
Position
...........................................
1=45
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position
...........................................
1-50
Top Strap
................................................... 1-41
Where to Put the Restraint
...........................
1-41
Chime Level Adjustment
.................................. 3-67
wyC4i
t;llt;
Llyr
ilGl
4-
IO
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle
...........................
5-72
Outside of Your Vehicle
................................
5-75
Underbody Maintenance
...............................
5-78
Weatherstrips
..............................................
5-75
Cleaning
Exterior LampdLenses
.......................
5-76
Top Strap Anchor Location
............................
1-42
P:
-.---
IL-
I
:-.LA--
A
+n
.............................................
Climate Control System
...................................
3-19
Outlet Adjustment
........................................
3-22
Compact Disc Messages
.................
3-42, 3-52, 3-64
Compact Spare Tire
........................................
5-71
Control of a Vehicle
..........................................
4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage
............................
3-31
Heater, Engine
............................................
2-20
Low Warning Light
.......................................
3-31
Cooling System
..............................................
5-28
Cruise Control
................................................
3-10
Cruise Control Light
........................................
3-36
Current and Past Model Order Forms
................
7-11
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation
.........
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
...............................
7-3
Customer Assistance Offices
........................... 7-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
.....................
7-2
GM Mobility Proaram for Persons with
Disabilities
................................................
7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
......
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
................................
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United
States
Gzvernment
....
.......
7-9
Clutch, Hydraulic
.............................................
5-22
Cupholder(s)
..................................................
2-34
..............
7-7
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Roadside Assistance Program
.........................
7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information
........
7-1
0
Customizing the Automatic Door Locks
.............
2-9
D
DAB Radio
................................................
3-65
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
.........................
3-14
Defensive Driving
.............................................
4-2
Defogging and Defrosting
.................................
3-20
Delayed Headlamps
........................................
3-1
5
Delayed Locking
...............................................
2-8
Dinghy Towing
......................
..................
4-32
Dolly Towing
........................
..............
4-33
Dome Lamp
.........................
..................
3-16
Door
Delayed Locking
...................
................
2-8
Power Door Locks
.........................................
2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
............... 2-8
Rear Security Locks
.....................................
2-10
Position, Safety Belt
.....................................
1-15
Six-Way Power Seat
......................................
1-3
At Night
.....................................................
4-15
City
...........................................................
4-20
Defensive
.....................................................
4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work
...............
.....
5-4
Locks
......................................................
2-7
Driver
Driving
Driving (cont.)
Drunken
.......................................................
4-2
Freeway
.....................................................
4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads
..............................
4-23
In Rain and on Wet Roads
...........................
4-17
Winter
........................................................
4-25
Driving On Grades
..........................................
4-41
Driving on Snow or Ice
....................................
4-26
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
...............
4-19
Driving Through Flowing Water
.........................
4-19
Driving with a Trailer
.......................................
4-40
E
Easy Entry Seat
...............................................
1-6
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment
......................................
5-81
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
...........................
5-81
Windshield Wiper Fuses
...............................
5-81
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
.....................
2-13
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
...................................................
3-33
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
.........................................
5-21
Battery
.......................................................
5-41
Change Engine Oil Light
............................... 3-35
Coolant
......................................................
5-23
Coolant Heater
............................................
2-20
Power Windows and Other Power Options
......
5-81
Check and Service Engine Soon Light
............
3-31
4
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Temperature Gage
...........................
3-31
Cooling System Inspection
............................
6-1 4
Engine Compartment Overview
......................
5-1
2
Exhaust
.....................................................
2-30
Oil
.............................................................
5-15
Overheating
................................................
5-26
Starting ..................................................
2-1
8
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
..................
5-84
Engine Coolant Level Check
..............................
6-9
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
..................
4-42
Engine Oil Additives
........................................
5-19
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
.....................
6-5
Enhanced Traction System(ETS)
.........................
4-9
Ac'rive Light
................................................
3-30
Warning Light
.............................................
3-29
Entry/Exit Lighting
...........................................
3-1 6
Express Down Window
....................................
2-15
Extender, Safety Belt
.......................................
1-31
Exterior Lamps
...............................................
3-13
Engine Oil Level Check
.....................................
6-9
F
FabridCarpet
...............................
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner
.....
(RDS. XMTM and DAB)
....
..............
3.46. 3-56
Finding a Station
............................
3-39, 3-44, 3-54
Finding
a
PTY
Station
............
5-73
5-2
1
Finish Care
................................................
5-76
Finish Damage
...............................................
5-77
Flat Tire
........................................................
5-61
Flat Tire, Changing
.........................................
5-62
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle
..................
........
5-22
Manual Transaxle
....................................
5-22
Power Steering
...........................................
5-35
Windshield Washer ......................................
5-36
Fog Lamps
....................................................
3-15
Folding the Seatback
........................................
1-8
Footmtes
........................................................
6-5
Fuel
...............................................................
5-5
Additives
......................................................
5-6
California Fuel
..............................................
5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
.....................
5-8
Filling Your -rank
...........................................
5-7
Gage
.........................................................
3-37
FM Stereo
.....................................................
3-65
Following Distance
..........................................
4-40
Fge!s
i~
Fnminn
Pnrrntrin
c.
"'V'Y"
v"u"L"-U
J-v
cr?
..............................
Gasoline Octane
...........................................
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
..................................
5-5
System Inspection
.......................................
6-14
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
...........................
5-81
Windshield Wiper
.........................................
5-81
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature
.........................
3-31
Fuel
..........................................................
3-37
Speedometer
..............................................
3-25
Tachometer
.................................................
3-25
Octane
........................................................
5-5
Specifications
...............................................
5-5
Glass Surfaces
...............................................
5-74
Glove Box
.....................................................
2-34
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities
....................................................
7-5
Gasoline
H
Head Restraints
...............................................
1-5
Headlamp
Aiming
.......................................................
5-47
Headlamps
....................................................
5-49
Bulb Replacement
.......................................
5-49
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
.............
5-50
Halogen Bulbs
............................................
5-49
Headlamps
Off
in PARK (P)
..............................
3-15
Highway Hypnosis
...........................................
4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads
..................................
4-23
Hitches
..........................................................
4-39
Hood
Checking Things Under
..............................
5-9
Release
.....................................................
5-10
Horn
...........................................................
3-6
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
.............................
............
5-30
How to Check
................................................
5-54
How to Check and Add Fluid
............................
5-23
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
..................
5-36
How to Use This Manual
......................................
ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
...................
1-14
Hydraulic Clutch
.............................................
5-22
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
........................
6-10
Hydroplaning
..................................................
4-18
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming From Your Engine
..........
5-27
If Steam
Is
Coming From Your Engine
...............
5-26
If the Light
Is
Flashing
.....................................
3-32
If the Light
Is
On Steady ................................. 3-33
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
.......
4-29
If You Do Decide
To
Pull
A
Trailer
.....................
4-37
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
...........................
4-27
Ignition Positions
.............................................
2-17
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
..........................
6-12
IHazard Warning Flashers
..................................
3-6
Indicators
.......................................................
3-23
Infants and Young Children, Restraints
...............
1-34
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure .................................. 5-54
Inspection
Brake System
.............................................
6-14
Engine Cooling System
................................
6-14
Fuel System
...............................................
6-14
Part C
.
Periodic Maintenance
.......................
6-13
Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal
.........................................
6-1 3
Throttle System
....................................
6-1 4
Cluster
.......................................................
3-24
Overview
.....................................................
3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness
.............................
3-1 6
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
(Passenger's Side)
.......................................
5-83
instrument Panel Fuse Block
(Driver's Side)
.............................................
5-82
Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks
...........................
5-81
Exhaust System
..........................................
6-13
Instrument Panel
Interior Lamps
................................................
3-16
Interior Plastic Components
..............................
5-74
J
Jump Starting
.................................................
5-42
Key Lock Cylinders Service
..............................
6-10
Key Removal
.................................................
2-29
Keyless Entry System
.......................................
2-3
Keys
...............................................................
2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior
............
....
........
3-13
Interior
.......................................................
3-16
Lap Belt
........................................................
1-27
Lap-Shoulder Belt
...................................
1.15. 1-24
LATCH System
Child Restraints
...........................................
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
........................................
1-45
Latches,
Seatback
............................................
1-5
Leather
.........................................................
5-74
Leaving Your Vehicle
.......................................
2-11
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
..........................................
2-28
Lift Seat, Power
.......................
.........
1-6
Light
...................................
3-26
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
...................
3-29
Brake System Warning
.................................
3-28
Change Engine Oil
......................................
3-35
Charging System
.........................................
3-27
Cruise Control
.............................................
3-36
Enhanced Traction System Warning
...............
3-29
Low Coolant Warning
...................................
3-31
.
A-ir
-"a
Ran
Rnadinncc
.V
UU
...
YYY
LI
c+,,,,
I
talIbGd
T;actior;
System
Active
J-JO
QQ
..................
7
Light (cont.)
Low Oil Level
.............................................
3-35
Low Washer Fluid Warning
...........................
3-36
Malfunction Indicator
....................................
3-31
Oil Pressure
...............................................
3-34
Safety Belt Reminder
...................................
3-26
Security
.....................................................
3-36
Service Vehicle Soon
...................................
3-36
Up-Shift
.....................................................
3-28
Loading Your Vehicle
.......................................
4-34
Lockout Protection
..........................................
2-1 1
Locks
Delayed Locking
.......................... ...... 2-8
Door
..........................................
..........
2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle
........................
....
2-11
Lockout Protection
...........................
....
2-11
Power Door
..................................................
2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
...............
2-8
Rear Door Security Locks
.............................
2-10
Loss of Control
...............................................
4-14
Low Coolant Warning Light
..............................
3-31
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
.......................
3-36
M
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts
........
5-88
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill
...........................................
6-9
At Least Once a Month
..................................
6-9
At Least Once a Year
..................................
6-10
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
At Least Twice a Year
..................................
6-10
Brake System Inspection
..............................
6-14
Engine Cooling System Inspection
.................
6-14
Exhaust System Inspection
...........................
6-13
Fuel System Inspection
................................
6-14
How This Section is Organized
.......................
6-3
Introduction
..................................................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements
.............................
6-2
Part A
- Scheduled Maintenance Services
.........
6-4
Part B
- Owner Checks and Services
...............
6-9
Part C
- Periodic Maintenance Inspections
......
6-13
Part D
- Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
...........................................
6-15
Part
E
-
Maintenance Record
........................
6-16
Scheduled Maintenance
.................................
6-5
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
..........................
6-13
Throttle System Inspection
............................
6-14
Using Your
...................................................
6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment
...............
6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
....
.....
4-42
Making Turns
....................................
.....
4-40
Malfunction Indicator Light
............................
3-31
Manual Seats
...................................................
1-2
Manual Transaxle
............................................
2-18
Fluid
..........................................................
5-22
Operation
...................................................
2-25
Manual Transaxle Check
..................................
6-10
Manual Windows
............................................
2-14
8
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
...............
2-5
Mexico. Central America and Caribbean
IslandslCountries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S.
Virgin Islands)
.......................................
7-4
Manual Rearview Mirror
................................ 2-32
Outside Convex Mirror
.................................
2-33
Outside Power Mirrors
..................................
2-33
Outside Remote Control Mirror
......................
2-32
Mirrors
New Vehicle Break-In
......................................
2-17
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
............
5-88
0
Odometer
......................................................
3-25
Off-Road Recovery
..........................................
4-1
2
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light
...............................
3-35
Low Oil bevel Light
......................................
3-35
Pressure Light
.............................................
3-34
Older Children, Restraints
................................
1-32
Operation
......................................................
3-1 9
Other Warning Devices
......................................
3-6
Outside
Engine
.......................................................
"
E-!
5
Outlet Adjiisti?ieiit
............................................
3-22
Convex Mirror
.............................................
2-33
Outside (cont.)
Power Mirrors
.............................................
2-33
Remote Control Mirror
................................
2-32
Owners. Canadian
...............................................
ii
Owner's Information
........................................
7-10
Park (P)
Parking
Shifting Out
of
.........
~~~~
................
2-28
Brake
............................
................
2-26
Over Things That Burn
.............................
2-29
Your Vehicle/Key Removal
............................
2-29
Parking Brake and Automatic Transax!e Park (P)
Mechanism Check
.......................................
6-12
Parking on Hills
..............................................
4-41
Park(
P)
Shifting Into
................................................
2-27
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services
............
6-4
Part B
- Owner Checks and Services
..................
6-9
Part D
-
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
....
6-15
Part
E
-
Maintenance Record
...........................
6-16
Passing
.................................................
4-13, 4-40
Passlock@
.....................................................
2-16
Plan Ahead When Possible
................................
7-7
Playing
a
Cassette Tape
..................................
3-61
Playing a Compact Disc
..................
3-41, 3-51, 3-63
Playing the Radio
...........................
3-39, 3-43, 3-53
I
UI
k
G
.
Pericdlc
??lzintzn2ncc
Inspcticns
..........
8-13
9
Power
.............................................................
1-3
Accessory Outlets
........................................
3-1
7
Door Locks
..................................................
2-8
Electrical System
.........................................
5-81
Lift Seat
.......................................................
1-6
Steering Fluid
............................................. 5-35
Windows
....................................................
2-1
5
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
..................
2-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
.........
1-13
Radio Messages
.............................................
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
................
Care
of
Your CD Player
...............................
Care of Your CDs
........................................
DAB Radio Antenna System
..........................
Radio with Cassette and CD
.........................
Radio with CD
....................................
3.39.
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS)
................................
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems
(RDS)
.......................
Theft-Deterrent
............................................
Understanding Reception
..............................
3-41
3-38
3-65
3-66
3-66
3-67
3-52
3-42
3-38
3-38
3-64
3-65
RDS and DAB Messages
.........................
3.47. 3-57
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
......................
1-29
Rear Seat Operation
.........................................
1-8
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
.............
1-23
Rear Window Defogger
....................................
3-21
Rearview Mirrors
.............................................
2-32
Reclining Seatbacks
..........................................
1-3
Recreational Vehicle Towing
.............................
4-31
Remote Keyless Entry System
............................
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation
............
2-4
Remote Trunk Release
....................................
2-12
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
........................
2-12
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
..................................................
5-64
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
...................
5-63
Replacement Bulbs
.........................................
5-51
Replacing Brake System Parts
..........................
5-41
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
.................................................
1-60
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government
...................................
7-9
General Motors
.............................................
7-9
United States Government
..............................
7-9
Restraint System Check
...................................
6-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems
...................
1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash
.....................................................
1-60
Checking
....................................................
1-60
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts
..................
1-23
Restraint Systems
10
Restraint Systems (cont.)
Restraints, Head
...............................................
1-5
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
......................
2-1
8
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts
......
1-23
Roadside
Assistance Program
....................................
7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle
To
Get It Out
...................
4-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
.......
2-30
Replacing Parts
...........................................
1-60
S
Safety BE
?It
Reminder Light
.........................................
3-26
Care
of
......................................................
5-75
Center Rear Passenger Position
....................
1-27
Driver Position
............................................
1-1
5
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
................
1-1 4
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
.....
1-1 3
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
......................................
1-29
Rear Seat Passengers
.................................
1-23
Right Front Passenger Position
......................
1-23
Safety Belt Extender
....................................
1-31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
.................
1-22
Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Are
for Everyone
.........
........
1-9
Safety Chains
.................................................
4-39
...
Safety Warnings and Symbols
..............................
III
Scheduled Maintenance
.....................................
6-5
Seatback Latches
.....
..
1-5
Seats
Easy Entry Seat
............................................
1-6
Head Restraints
............................................
1-5
Manual
........................................................
1-2
Power Lift Seat
.............................................
1-6
Rear Seat Operation
......................................
1-8
Reclining Seatbacks
......................................
1-3
Seatback Latches
.......................................... 1-5
Six-Way Power Driver
....................................
1-3
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position
............................ 1-48
Designed for the LATCH System
...................
1-45
Rear Outside Seat Position
...........................
1-45
Right Front Seat Position
..............................
1-50
Security
Light
.................................................
3-36
Security While You Travel
..................................
7-5
Service
...........................................................
5-3
Vehicle
.....................................................
5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Doing Your Own Work
...................................
5-4
Engine Soon Light
.......................................
3-31
“rubiicaiions Ordering information
1-1w
Vehicle Soon Light
.......................................
3-36
Service Bulletins
.............................................
7-10
Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
or Check Engine Light in Canada
..................
3-31
Service Manuals
.............................................
7-10
Setting Preset PTYs
(RDS
Only)
...............
3-47, 3-57
-
...................
Setting Preset Stations
....................
3-40, 3-45, 3-55
11
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS)
.........
3-38
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS)
.....
3-38
Setting the Tone (BassTTreble)
..........
3.40. 3.45. 3-55
Sheet Metal Damage
.......................................
5-77
Shift Speeds
..................................................
2-26
Shifting Into Park (P)
.......................................
2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P)
...................................
2-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
...........................
1-1 7
Skidding
........................................................
4-1 4
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
.......................
4-19
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
...
.......
5-73
Specifications, Capacities
..................
...
5-86
Speedometer
..............................................
3-25
Starter Switch Check
.......................................
6-1
1
Starting Your 2.2L L4 ECOTECTM Engine
...........
2-19
Starting Your 3400
V6
Engine
...........................
2-19
Starting Your Engine
...................................
2-18
Steering
.............................................
... 4-10
Steering in Emergencies
..................................
4-1 1
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
..............................
6-13
Steering Tips
.......................................
,
...
4-10
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area
........................
2-34
Cupholder(s)
...............................................
2-34
Glove Box
..................................................
2-34
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
..........................
5-69
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
.......................
5-70
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow
......................
4-29
Sun Visors
.................................................
2-15
Sunroof
.....................................................
2-35
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
...........
1-53
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
....................
1-57
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
.........
1-59
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
....................
1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates?
..
1-57
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
...................
1-56
Where Are the Air Bags?
..............................
1-55
Tachometer
....................................................
3-25
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps
..........................
5-50
Theft-Deterrent, Radio
.....................................
3-64
Theft-Deterrent Systems
...................................
2-16
Passlock@
..................................................
2-16
Throttle System Inspection
...............................
6-14
Tilt Wheel
........................................................
3-7
Tire Inflation Check
...........................................
6-9
Tires
.....................................................
5-53, 5-77
Buying New Tires
........................................
5-56
Chains
.......................................................
5-60
Changing a Flat Tire
....................................
5-62
Compact Spare Tire
.....................................
5-71
If a Tire Goes Flat
.......................................
5-61
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure
...............................
5-54
Inspection and Rotation
................................
5-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
.........................
5-57
12
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
.................
5-58
Wheel Replacement
.....................................
5-59
When It
Is
Time for New Tires
......................
5-56
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
....................
2-21
Top of the Instrument Panel
.............................
5-74
Top Strap
...................................................... 1-41
Top Strap Anchor Location
...............................
1-42
Torque Lock
...................................................
2-28
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
..................
4-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle
.....................................
4-31
Towing a Trailer
..........................................
4-36
Your Vehicle
...............................................
4-31
Traction
Enhmced Traction Systerr; Active Light
...........
3-30
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
........
3-29
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
....................
4-9
Trailer Brakes
.................................................
4-39
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic
...........................................
5-22
Fluid, Manual
..............................................
5-22
T
-
-
..
I
-
n-
-.--a:
-
.-
A
.
.I
-.--
-L:-
I
I
dl
13dAlt:
Upel
dllUl
I,
fiUlUl1
ldllb
6-66
A
nA
.........................
Transaxle Operation, Manual
............................
2-25
Transmission
Up-Shift Light
..............................................
3-28
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual
........................................ 7-10
Transportation Options
......................................
7-7
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
...................................
2-1 3
Trip Odometer
..........
...........................
3-25
Trunk
............................................................
2-11
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
..........................
3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
...........................
3-7
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
.................. 4-41
Trunk Lamp
...................................................
3-16
Underbody Flushing Service
.............................
6-12
Understanding Radio Reception
........................
3-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
............................
5-57
United States
...................................................
7-4
Up-Shift Light
.................................................
3-28
Used Replacement Wheels
..............................
5-60
using Cleaner on Fabric
..................................
5-73
v
Vehicle
Control
...........................
.....................
4-5
Damage Warnings
...........................................
iv
Loading
......................................................
4-34
Service Soon Light
......................................
3-36
Parking Your
...............................................
2-29
Symbols
.........................................................
iv
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.............................................
5-80
Service Parts Identification Label
...................
5-80
Vehicle Storage
.............................................. 5-41
13
Ventilation Adjustment
......................................
3-22
Vinyl
.............................................................
5-74
Visor Vanity Mirror
.......................................... 2-15
Visors
...........................................................
2-1
5
Warning Lights. Gages and indicators
................
3-23
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers
...............................
3-6
Other Warning Devices
..................................
3-6
Safety and Symbols
.........................................
iii
Vehicle Damage
..............................................
iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light
......................
3-36
Washing Your Vehicle
......................................
5-75
Weatherstrip Lubrication
................................... 6-1
0
Weight of the Trailer
........................................
4-37
Weight
of
the Trailer Tongue
.............................
4-38
What Kind
of
Engine Oil to Use
........................
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil
................................
5-20
What to Use
..........................................
5-24, 5-36
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance
..........................
5-58
Replacement
...............................................
5-59
When to Add Engine Oil
.................................. 5-17
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life SystemTM)
................................
5-19
When to Check
..............................................
5-54
When to Check and What to Use
.....................
5-23
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
................
5-35
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill
.....................................................
4-42
Where to Put the Restraint
...........
............
1-41
Window Lockout
.............................................
2-15
Windows
.......................................................
2-14
Manual
......................................................
2-14
Power
........................................................
2-15
Windshield and Wiper Blades
.......................
5-76
Windshield Washer
.....................................
3-10
Fluid
..........................................................
5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
.................
6-9
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
......................................
5-52
Fuses
........................................................
5-81
Windshield Wipers
............................................
3-9
Winter Driving
.........
................................
4-25
Wiper Blade Check
.....
........
........
6-10
Why Safety Belts Work
.................................... 1-10
X
XMTM Satellite Radio Antenna System
................
3-67
XMTM Satellite Radio Service
............................
3-65
Your Vehicle and the Environment
.......................
6-2
14
1
I
